Yamaha P-150 Handleiding

Merk: Yamaha

Model: P-150

Categorie: Synthesizer

Type: Handleiding

Deze handleiding is ook geschikt voor

150B

Congratulations! …and thank you for purchasing the

Yamaha P-150. The P-150 is a high-performance

electronic piano with full-scale, weighted action

keyboard, a selection of high quality piano and other

useful instrument voices, and versatile performance

and other advanced features which make it ideal for

professional stage and studio applications, as well as

for home entertainment and music study use. The P-

150’s main features include:

■ High quality AWM piano

and other sounds

The P-150 features a selection of twelve high quality instrument

voices generated by Yamaha’s patented AWM (Advanced Wave

Memory) sound generation technology. There are several piano

sounds—including a concert grand piano, with full-bodied bass

tones and reverberating high notes, that accurately captures the

natural characteristics of a real grand piano—plus various

electric pianos, vibes, organ combinations, strings and electric

and upright bass. With a maximum simultaneous “polyphonic”

note output of 32 notes, the P-150 delivers uncompromising

performance capabilities.

■ Organ combination editing

The P-150 comes equipped with two preset organ voices, plus

organ combination editing features which let you create your

own organ sounds and store them in Performances for instant

recall. The organ combination editing features give you precise

control over flute footages as well as attack settings.

■ Digital signal processing

The P-150 has a built-in digital signal processor that lets you

apply stereo reverb, chorus, symphonic and tremolo effects to

the voices, and lets you tailor the quality of the voices to suit

your needs with an internal equalizer, as well as a three-band

graphic equalizer on the upper panel.

■ Touch-sensitive keyboard with velocity

scaling

The P-150’s full-range 88-key, weighted action piano keyboard

incorporates Yamaha’s unique Action Effect II keyboard

technology, which gives it the genuine feel and response of a

real piano keyboard. You can even adjust the keyboard’s

sensitivity level, or velocity scaling, to suit your playing style, for

both internal tone generator and MIDI message transmission.

■ Dual and Split voice modes

The P-150’s Dual and Split modes let you play two voices at

once, a “main” voice and a “sub” voice, either by layering the two

voices of your choice (Dual mode) or by assigning a different

voice to each end of the keyboard (Split mode). In Split mode,

the key transposition values can be set independently for both

main and sub voices.

■ One-touch Performance recall

The P-150 features a Performance Play mode that lets you store

up to 24 Performances, or configurations of all voice, MIDI and

other parameter settings, for recall at the touch of a button. This

lets you instantly change your sound and entire setup as you

play, or between songs in a live set. The P-150 is set at the

factory with 24 Preset Performances, but you can overwrite them

and store User Performances which you create yourself. The P-

150 features extensive editing and storing capabilities.

■ Master keyboard features

The P-150 offers many of the control features standard in a MIDI

master keyboard, including velocity sensitivity, pitch bend and

modulation wheels, an assignable CS (continuous slider),

program change send and receive capabilities, MIDI transpose

and merge functions, and bulk dumping and multitimbral

capabilities. Plus, the P-150 gives you the option of connecting a

foot controller (FC) that can be assigned MIDI and other

functions in the same manner as the CS. With its powerful MIDI

capabilities, the P-150 can easily feature at the heart of an

expanded MIDI system.

How to Use this Manual

This owner’s manual is organized and designed to help you get set

up and begin enjoying the P-150 as quickly as possible, as well as

to easily locate and learn about any feature you need.

The GETTING STARTED section briefly but thoroughly explains the

proper procedure for setting up the instrument, listening to the on-

board Demo songs, and exploring the basic voices.

The VOICE PLAY MODE, PERFORMANCE PLAY MODE and EDIT

MODE sections include explanations of each feature and step-by-

step details about how to access and manipulate the many

parameters.

An APPENDIX provides Voice and Performance lists and other

technical information, including descriptions of error messages and

a troubleshooting guide, plus MIDI specifications and other MIDI

related information.

Finally, an alphabetical INDEX lets you quickly reference the page

number of any feature you want to locate.

Special Symbols

Throughout this manual two special symbols are used to connote

additional information.

Indicates an important cautionary note for the feature being

described.

Indicates a supplementary explanation for the feature being

described.

■ Location

Do not use the P-150 in locations where it will be exposed to

direct sunlight, extreme temperatures, high humidity or

excessive dust or vibration.

■ Handling

Avoid rough handling. Do not drop the P-150 or subject it to

shock, as these can damage the instrument’s internal circuitry.

Also, do not apply excessive force to the controls or terminals.

When moving the P-150, first unplug the AC power cord and all

other cables to prevent damage to the cords and jacks. When

removing plugs from terminals, always grip the plugs directly

rather than pulling on the cord.

■ Cleaning

To clean the P-150, use a slightly moist cloth and a neutral

cleanser. Do not use abrasive cleansers, waxes, solvents, or

chemically treated cloths, as these may damage the cabinet’s

finish or dull the keys.

■ AC Power

The power requirements of your P-150 has been set to match

the main power supply voltage in your area. Make sure that your

local AC mains voltage matches the voltage as specified on the

name plate located on the rear panel of your P-150. If you plan

to use your P-150 in an area with a different voltage, be sure to

use an appropriate converter. If you have any doubts about

voltage compatibility, please consult your local Yamaha dealer.

■ Electromagnetic Interference

Avoid using your P-150 near televisions, radios or other devices

which generate electromagnetic fields, as electromagnetic

interference can cause the P-150 to malfunction, and may

generate interference noise in the other devices as well.

■ Extended Disuse

Electrical storms can cause power surges which can damage the

P-150’s circuitry even if the power switch is turned off. Therefore,

it is best to disconnect the P-150’s power cord from the AC outlet

when you will not be using it for an extended period of time.

■ Service and Modification

The P-150 contains no user serviceable parts, so never open the

instrument’s cabinet or tamper with the internal circuitry or

mechanisms in any way. Doing so can result in electrical shock

or damage to the P-150. Refer all servicing to qualified Yamaha

service personnel.

■ Backup Battery

The P-150’s internal settings are preserved by a lithium backup

battery which has a life span of approximately five years. (The

battery’s life span may differ, depending on the time elapsed

between your P-150’s date of manufacture and the date you

purchased it.) When the battery charge runs low, the “ERROR1

REPLACE BATTERY” error message will appear in the LCD

screen. If this message appears, save any settings you may

want to keep to an external data storage device (such as the

Yamaha MDF2 Data Filer) using the bulk dump procedure, then

contact a qualified Yamaha service center to have the battery

replaced. Do not attempt to replace the backup battery yourself!

YAMAHA CANNOT BE HELD RESPONSIBLE FOR DAMAGE

CAUSED BY IMPROPER HANDLING OR OPERATION OF THE

P-150!

The LCD screen displays as illustrated in this manual are for instructional

purposes only, and may appear somewhat different from your P-150’s.

INTRODUCTION............................................................................................................ 1

PRECAUTIONS............................................................................................................. 2

UPPER PANEL.............................................................................................................. 4

REAR PANEL ................................................................................................................ 9

P-150 OVERVIEW....................................................................................................... 10

GETTING STARTED ................................................................................................... 14

Setting up the P-150............................................................................................................. 14

Turning on the Power ........................................................................................................... 16

Playing the Demo Songs...................................................................................................... 17

Playing the Voices................................................................................................................ 18

VOICE PLAY MODE.................................................................................................... 19

Single Mode.......................................................................................................................... 20

Stereo/Mono Piano...............................................................................................................21

Electric/Upright Bass ............................................................................................................ 21

Reverb Effects ...................................................................................................................... 22

Modulation Effects................................................................................................................ 23

Panel Equalizer..................................................................................................................... 25

Main and Sub Voices............................................................................................................ 25

Dual Mode ............................................................................................................................ 26

Split Mode............................................................................................................................. 28

Transpose............................................................................................................................. 33

MIDI Transmit Enable........................................................................................................... 36

MIDI Panic ............................................................................................................................ 37

PERFORMANCE PLAY MODE................................................................................... 38

Selecting Single Voices........................................................................................................ 39

Selecting Dual Voices...........................................................................................................40

Selecting Split Voices........................................................................................................... 40

EDIT MODE................................................................................................................. 42

System.................................................................................................................................. 44

MIDI Filter ............................................................................................................................. 46

Program Change (PC) Table................................................................................................ 46

Channel ................................................................................................................................ 47

Local..................................................................................................................................... 48

Continuous Slider (CS) / Foot Controller (FC)...................................................................... 48

Panel Switch (PS)................................................................................................................. 50

Name.................................................................................................................................... 50

Organ Combination...............................................................................................................50

Pitch Bend Wheel (PB) / Modulation Wheel (MW) ............................................................... 51

Keyboard Sensitivity............................................................................................................. 51

Internal Equalizer.................................................................................................................. 52

Reverb.................................................................................................................................. 52

Modulation ............................................................................................................................ 52

STORE......................................................................................................................... 53

APPENDIX................................................................................................................... 55

Bulk Dump .............................................................................................................................55

Initialize................................................................................................................................. 56

Using MIDI............................................................................................................................ 57

Error Messages .................................................................................................................... 60

Troubleshooting.................................................................................................................... 61

Specifications.........................................................................................................................63

Factory Default Settings ........................................................................................................64

Blank Chart............................................................................................................................70

MIDI Data Format ..................................................................................................................72

MIDI Implementation Chart....................................................................................................81

Index......................................................................................................................................82

UPPER PANEL

REAR PANEL

P-150 OVERVIEW

GETTING STARTED

VOICE PLAY MODE

PERFORMANCE

PLAY MODE

EDIT MODE

STORE

APPENDIX

UPPER PANEL

ON/ OFF

POWER

CONTRAST

PITCH MODULATION

MIN

MAX

VOLUME

-1/NO +1/YES

BALANCE DETUNE

PAGE

PS1 PS2 SPLIT TRANSPOSE MIDI

DATA ENTRY

1 [PHONES] jack

This jack on the front panel lets you connect a pair of stereo

headphones to the P-150 for private listening. The internal

speakers will automatically be disconnected when you plug in

the headphones. The sound of the internal voices output from

the [OUTPUT] jacks is not affected.

2 Keyboard

This 88-key weighted action, touch-sensitive keyboard

incorporates Yamaha’s unique Action Effect II keyboard

technology, which gives it the genuine feel and response of a

real piano keyboard.

3 Speakers

These two built-in 13 cm speakers each provide an output of 20

watts. If you connect the P-150 to an external monitor system,

you may choose to turn the speakers off using the [SPEAKER]

switch located on the rear panel.

UPPER PANEL

OUT

MIDI

IN THRU FOOT CONTROLLER SOFT SOSTENUTO SUSTAIN

ONOFF

SPEAKEROUTPUT

L/MONO R

INPUT

L/MONOL/MONO R

EDIT PERF.B VOICE

STORE PERF.A

SYSTEM

MIDI FILTER PC TABLE CHANNEL LOCAL CS FC PS NAME ORGAN

COMBINATION

PB MW KBD SENS. INT.EQ

PIANO 1

123456789101112

PIANO 2 PIANO 3 PIANO 4 E.PIANO 1 E.PIANO 2 E.PIANO 3 VIBES ORGAN1 ORGAN2 STRINGS BASS HALL

STAGE

ROOM

TREMOLO

SYMPHONIC

CHORUS

REVERB MODULATION

HIGHMIDDLELOW

EQUALIZEREFFECT

UPPER PANEL

ON/ OFF

POWER

PITCH

MODULATION

2 3

1 [POWER] switch

This switch turns the power on and off. When the power is

turned on, the mode and status designated when the power was

previously turned off will still be active.

2 [PITCH] wheel

This wheel can be used to bend the pitch of the notes that you

play, up or down; the wheel automatically returns to the center

position when you release it. (In Dual mode, both voices are

affected; in Split mode, only the main voice is affected.) When

the MIDI Transmit Switch is enabled, you can use it to transmit

pitch bend messages to other instruments. You can assign the

pitch bend range to any value within a one-octave range.

3 [MODULATION] wheel

This wheel can be used in various ways. Normally you will use it

to apply a vibrato effect to the notes that you play, with

increasing intensity as you roll it upwards; the wheel remains at

the specific position that you set it when you let go of it. (In Dual

mode, both voices are modulated; in Split mode, only the main

voice is modulated. The vibrato effect cannot be applied to Piano

voices 1 ~ 4.) You can also assign it to control reverb depth or

modulation speed. When MIDI transmission is enabled, you can

use it to transmit modulation messages to other instruments.

■UPPER PANEL—A

UPPER PANEL

1 [VOLUME] slider

This slider adjusts the overall volume of sound output from the

internal speakers (or headphones, if connected) as well as the

sound output from the [OUTPUT] jacks on the rear panel.

Moving the slider upward increases volume level, while moving

the slider downward decreases volume level.

2 [CS, DATA ENTRY] slider

This is a multiple function slider. As a [CS] (continuous slider),

you can assign it to control a variety of functions. As a [DATA

ENTRY] slider, you can use it to change specific settings and

parameters, depending on the current mode and status. Moving

the slider upward increases the specified value, while moving the

slider downward decreases the specified value.

3 [PS1, –1/NO] button

This is a dual function button. As a [PS1] (Panel Switch 1)

button, you can assign it to control various functions of the

internal voices as well as connected MIDI devices, as set by the

PS Edit function. As a [–1/NO] button, you can use it to change

parameter settings in decrements.

4 [PS2, +1/YES] button

This is a dual function button. As a [PS2] (Panel Switch 2)

button, you can assign it to control various functions of the

internal voices as well as connected MIDI devices, as set by the

PS Edit function. As a [+1/YES] button, you can use it to change

parameter settings in increments.

5 [SPLIT, BALANCE, 1] button

This is a multiple function button. As a [SPLIT] button, you can

use it to enter Split mode, whether in Voice Play or Performance

Play mode, determine the split point and assign the keyboard

area for the main and sub voices. As a [BALANCE] button, you

can use it to set the relative volume levels of each Split and Dual

voice, by holding the [BALANCE] button and moving the [DATA

ENTRY] slider ". As a [1] (cursor left) button in Edit mode, you

can use it to move the cursor to the left in the LCD screen in

order to position it over a desired parameter.

6 [TRANSPOSE, DETUNE, q] button

This is a multiple function button. As a [TRANSPOSE] button,

you can use it to set the keyboard transpose value for single as

well as both Dual voices or Split voices. As a [DETUNE] button,

you can use it to set the detune value for the two Dual voices, by

holding it and moving the [DATA ENTRY] slider ". As a [q]

(cursor right) button in Edit mode, you can use it to move the

cursor to the right in the LCD screen in order to position it over a

desired parameter.

7 [MIDI, PAGE] button

This is a dual function button. As a [MIDI] transmit button, you

can use it to quickly enable or disable the P-150’s transmission

of MIDI messages. You can also hold the [MIDI] button while

pressing other buttons to access certain features. As a [PAGE]

button, you can use it to step through the various pages of Edit

functions when the P-150 is in Edit mode.

8 [CONTRAST] dial

This dial lets you adjust the contrast of the LCD screen for

optimum visibility. Rotating it to the left will decrease screen

contrast, while rotating it to the right will increase screen

contrast.

9 LCD screen

This backlit 32-character Liquid Crystal Display screen provides

various information about the modes and operating status of the

P-150. Certain messages are displayed only temporarily, but you

can designate the “Popup Time” according to your preference.

CONTRAST

MIN

MAX

VOLUME

-1/NO +1/YES

BALANCE DETUNE

PAGE

PS1 PS2 SPLIT TRANSPOSE MIDI

DATA ENTRY

1 2 3 4 5 6

■ UPPER PANEL— B

UPPER PANEL

1 [STORE] button

This button lets you store changes that you make to a

Performance, as well as copy the current Performance into

any Performance memory. The P-150 can store 24

Performances.

2 [EDIT] button

This button lets you enter Edit mode and access the various

Edit functions. After pressing it once, the LED above the

[EDIT] button will begin blinking, as will the light above the

currently selected [EDIT SELECT] button % . Pressing it again

will return you to the previous Play mode.

3 [PERF. A, B] buttons

These buttons let you enter Performance Play mode and

select any of the 24 Performances. The P-150 is set at the

factory with 24 Preset Performances, but you can overwrite

them and store User Performances which you create yourself.

The [PERF. A] and [PERF. B] banks hold 12 Performances

each, and a lit LED above one of the buttons indicates the

currently active bank.

4 [VOICE] button

This button lets you enter Voice Play mode by pressing

[VOICE] and then pressing a [VOICE SELECT] button % . A lit

LED above the [VOICE] button indicates you’re in Voice Play

mode.

5 [VOICE, PERFORMANCE, EDIT SELECT] buttons

These 12 buttons each have multiple functions, depending on

the current mode. In Voice Play mode you can use them to

select any of the 12 preset AWM instrument voices you want

to play; the voice names are printed in red above the buttons.

In Performance Play mode you can use them to select any of

the 24 Performances (12 Performances per bank); the

Performance numbers are printed above the buttons. In Edit

mode, you can use them to select the Edit functions; the Edit

function names are printed in green below the buttons.

6 [REVERB] button

This button lets you select either a Room, Stage or Hall reverb

effect, or no reverb effect, to apply to the currently selected

voice. Each voice has a default reverb setting preprogrammed

at the factory which you can change.

7 [MODULATION] button

This button lets you select either a Chorus, Symphonic or

Tremolo modulation effect, or no modulation effect, to apply to

the currently selected voice. Each voice has a default

modulation setting preprogrammed at the factory which you

can change.

8 [EQUALIZER] sliders

These sliders let you graphically adjust the level of the sound

output of the P-150 in three bands: High, Middle and Low. In

Dual and Split modes, the changes you make will affect both

voices.

EDIT PERF.B VOICE

STORE PERF.A

SYSTEM

MIDI FILTER PC TABLE CHANNEL LOCAL CS FC PS NAME ORGAN

COMBINATION

PB MW KBD SENS. INT.EQ

PIANO 1

123456789101112

PIANO 2 PIANO 3 PIANO 4 E.PIANO 1 E.PIANO 2 E.PIANO 3 VIBES ORGAN1 ORGAN2 STRINGS BASS HALL

STAGE

ROOM

TREMOLO

SYMPHONIC

CHORUS

REVERB MODULATION

HIGHMIDDLELOW

EQUALIZEREFFECT

3 456 7 8

■UPPER PANEL—C

SPEAKER

ON OFF

R L/MONO

SOFTSOSTENUTOSUSTAIN FOOT CONTROLLER

MIDI

OUT

THRU IN

R L/MONO

INPUT

OUTPUT

1 2 3 5 64

1 [SPEAKER] switch

This switch lets you turn off the P-150’s internal speakers. It

does not affect the output from the [OUTPUT] jacks or the

[PHONES] jack.

2 [INPUT] jacks

These jacks let you input line-level signals from another

electronic instrument, such as a rhythm programmer, external

tone generator, or synthesizer, and monitor it through the P-

150’s internal speakers. Use the [L/MONO] jack when

connecting only a single line.

3 [OUTPUT] jacks

These jacks output line-level signals which can be input directly

to an external amplifier, mixer or other audio device. Use the

[L/MONO] jack if your audio equipment has only one input.

4 Pedal jacks

These jacks let you connect up to three foot pedals and use

them as sustain, sostenuto and soft pedals. A single FC4

footswitch is included with your P-150. If you wish to attach

additional foot pedals, be sure to use only Yamaha models FC4

or FC5.

5 [FOOT CONTROLLER] jack

This jack lets you connect a foot controller (Yamaha FC7,

available separately) for use as an auxiliary controller. The [FC]

foot controller can be assigned to control a variety of functions,

including reverb depth or modulation speed, which lets you

change these parameters by foot as you play.

6 [MIDI] terminals

These terminals allow the P-150 to communicate with other MIDI

devices, using standard MIDI cables. To control the P-150 using

a sequencer or another keyboard, connect the MIDI out jack of

the external device to the [MIDI IN] jack of the P-150. To control

another device (such as a synthesizer or tone generator) using

the P-150, connect the [MIDI OUT] jack of the P-150 to the MIDI

in jack of the external device. The [MIDI THRU] jack simply

passes the data received at the P-150’s [MIDI IN] jack through

unaffected, and is used when connecting three or more MIDI

devices in a series.

P-150 OVERVIEW

■Voice Play and Performance Play Modes

The P-150 has two basic Play modes, Voice Play mode and Performance Play

mode. Within each mode are various Voice and Performance parameters, or

settings that you can change, which make up the sound of the selected voice and

the specific operating status of the P-150.

A group of overall System settings apply to both Voice Play and Performance Play

modes, and Edit mode lets you access and edit a wide variety of System and other

functions, as shown in the following illustration.

As the above illustration shows, the primary difference between Voice Play mode

and Performance Play mode is:

■ In Voice Play mode, a single set of Performance parameter settings apply to any

voice (and its specified Voice parameter settings) which you select.

■ In Performance Play mode, a complete set of Performance parameters can be

configured specifically for any particular voice (and its specified Voice parameter

settings). The P-150 can store up to 24 Performances for instant recall.

Normally you will operate in Voice Play mode, Auto Store status (See “About Store

Type”, next page)—as you select sounds and make parameter assignments as

dictated by your current music session. Then you can store those settings to any

of the 24 Performances, which you can then access at any time by the press of a

[PERFORMANCE SELECT] button in Performance Play mode. (You can also

perform bulk dump operations of Performance data to and from an external MIDI

device such as the Yamaha MDF2 MIDI Data Filer.)

PERFORMANCE PLAY MODEVOICE PLAY MODE

SYSTEM

EDIT MODE / STORE FUNCTIONS

PERF.A

01~12

PERF.B

01~12

VOICE

PARAMETERS

VOICE 01~12

PAFORMANCE

PARAMETERS

P-150 OVERVIEW

■ Voice Parameters

In Voice Play mode, each of the P-150’s AWM instrument voices have a set of

Voice parameters that are initially set at the factory, but which you can change to

suit your needs.

These include controller parameters such as pitch bend range and modulation

wheel assignment, keyboard sensitivity parameters for internal or MIDI

applications, and effect parameters such as reverb type and depth, modulation

type and speed, and internal equalizer settings.

In Voice Play mode you can access a single set of Performance parameters and in

Performance Play mode you can access 24 sets of Performance parameters.

Although you can freely change the voices in Performance Play mode, only a

single set of Voice parameters is available for each Performance.

VOICE PARAMETERS

CONTROLLERS

• Pitch Bend Range

• Modulation Wheel Assign

KEYBOARD SENSITIVITY

• Internal

• MIDI

EFFECT

• Reverb Type, Speed

• Modulation Type, Speed

• Equalizer (Internal) Low, Mid, High

ABOUT STORE TYPE

You can choose the Store Type—Non Auto Store and Auto Store.

When Non Auto Store is selected, the store operation is always required

(except when modifying System related parameters; see page 13) if you want

to save the current settings.

When Auto Store is selected, all changes you make will automatically be

stored without the need to perform a specific storing procedure.

The default setting for a new (or initialized) P-150 is Non Auto Store. (For

information about changing the Store Type, see page 45.)

Explanations in this Owner’s Manual assume that Auto Store is selected.

Therefore, the LCD illustrations herein may be slightly different than the

screens on your P-150.

P-150 OVERVIEW

■Performance Parameters

In Performance Play mode, the P-150 has 24 sets of Performance parameters

which let you configure settings for specific music situations (i.e., for a certain style

of music, or a particular song, or for a practice session, or a live set, etc.). This

affords you the convenience of being able to recall those settings instantly at the

press of a button when in Performance Play mode.

Performance parameters include the voice selection (a set of voice parameters),

keyboard Single, Dual or Split mode and settings, main and sub voice

assignments, User organ combination values, transposition values, keyboard local

on or off setting, MIDI transmit and receive channel numbers, plus function

assignments for [PS1], [PS2], [CS] and [FC] (foot controller), the Performance

name and others.

In Voice Play mode you can specify settings for a single set of Performance

parameters.

Performance Parameters

VOICE SELECT

12 voices

(A set of voice parameters)

KEYBOARD MODE Single, Dual, Split

VOICE Main, Sub

PIANO 1/2 Stereo, Mono

BASS Electric, Upright

ORGAN COMBINATION

• Footage

• Response,

Attack (Length and Mode)

BALANCE –16 ~ 15

DETUNE 0 ~ 7

SPLIT POINT

• A-1 ~ C7

• MAIN VOICE (Upper, Lower)

TRANSPOSE

• Enable Switch

• Internal Main, Sub

• MIDI Main, Sub

MIDI CHANNEL

• Transmit

• Receive

LOCAL On, Off

CONTROLLERS

• PS 1/2 Assign

• CS Assign, Range

• FC Assign, Range

NAME Character select

P-150 OVERVIEW

Descriptions of all parameters and

details about how to access and

manipulate them are provided in the

appropriate sections herein. Also see

the Blank Chart on page 65.

■ System Settings

The P-150’s overall System settings encompass those “global” parameters which

are related to the instrument as a whole, and which therefore affect both Voice

Play and Performance Play modes.

These include master tuning, MIDI transmit enable, MIDI filter transmit and receive

parameter settings, MIDI program change table settings, and others.

SYSTEM

MIDI TRANSMIT ENABLE On, Off

• Master Tune

• Reverb Bypass

• Device Number

SYSTEM • MIDI Merge

• Performance Enable

• Popup Time

• Store Type

MIDI FILTER

• Transmit

• Receive

PROGRAM CHANGE TABLE

• Transmit Number, Bank

Select Number

• Receive Number

■Editing and Storing Features

When the P-150 is in Edit mode, you can access and modify the System and other

parameters.

A convenient Auto Store feature (which you can disengage) automatically stores

the System settings and other parameters as you change them. Within either

Voice Play mode or Performance Play mode, you can store the current set of all

settings as a User Performance.

There is a fine distinction between Voice Play mode store and Performance Play

mode store functions. In Voice Play mode, you can overwrite the current set of

Voice and Performance parameter settings. In Performance Play mode, you can

select a specific destination Performance in which to store the current

Performance parameter settings. Therefore, if you select a destination

Performance in which to store the current Voice Play mode Performance

parameter settings, you are storing it in the Performance Play mode.

You will find it most convenient to set up your Performances in Voice Play mode,

Auto Store status, since voice selection is so simple, then copy it to one of the 24

Performance memories for instant recall when you need it.

By switching into Non Auto Store status, you can be sure that your Performances

are protected, and any changes you make in one will not be applied unless you

specifically store, or overwrite, it. In Edit mode, the P-150 will prompt you

automatically whether or not to overwrite the current changes.

You can also dump Performance data to and from external MIDI devices.

GETTING STARTED

■Setting up the P-150

Although setting up the P-150 for basic play is easy and straightforward, be sure to

take heed of the Precautions on page 2 before you begin, then carefully follow the

simple steps as outlined below.

P-150 SETUP PROCEDURE

Prepare a suitable location.

The P-150 is relatively small for an 88-key instrument, but it is very solidly

built and therefore quite heavy. First you’ll want to prepare a suitable location

for your P-150. Please do not hesitate to ask someone to help you take it out

of the box and carefully place it on an optionally available Yamaha LP-3

keyboard stand or a sturdy table.

Plug in the power cord.

Next plug the P-150’s power cord into an AC outlet. Do not turn on the

[POWER] switch until you have made all connections as described below.

Connect the sustain pedal.

Next plug the supplied FC4 footswitch into the [SUSTAIN] jack on the rear

panel, so you can use it as a sustain pedal. If you have purchased additional

FC4 or FC5 footswitches, connect them to the [SOSTENUTO] and [SOFT]

jacks.

SPEAKER

ON OFF

R L/MONO

SOFTSOSTENUTOSUSTAIN FOOT CONTROLLER

MIDI

OUT

THRU IN

R L/MONO

INPUT

Footswitch FC4

OUTPUT

GETTING STARTED

Before connecting the P-150 to any

external device, be sure that the

power switches of all devices are

turned off.

Connect external line-level components.

If you wish to monitor the P-150’s output using an external line-level mixer or

amplifier, connect the input of the external component to the P-150’s

[OUTPUT] jacks on the rear panel. (Use both jacks for stereo output; use the

[L/MONO] jack for mono output.)

If you wish to listen to your P-150 using headphones, connect a pair of

stereo headphones to the [PHONES] jack located on the left side of the front

panel. The P-150’s internal speakers will automatically be disconnected

whenever headphones are plugged into the [PHONES] jack.

If you wish to monitor the output of an external line-level device (such as a

rhythm programmer, tone generator or synthesizer) via the P-150’s internal

speakers, connect the output of the external device to the P-150’s [INPUT]

jacks on the rear panel. (Use both jacks for stereo input; use the [L/MONO]

jack for mono input.)

OUTPUT R

OUTPUT L/MONO

P-150

Amp

Speaker (L) Speaker (R)

P-150

INPUT R

INPUT L/MONO

P-150

Tone Generator

GETTING STARTED

Connect MIDI devices.

If you wish to connect the P-150 to external MIDI devices such as a

rhythm programmer, tone generator or synthesizer, you will need special

MIDI cables which plug into the [MIDI] jacks on the rear panel. First,

however, you must determine a MIDI system configuration, based on your

particular needs or desires. Some examples of MIDI system connections,

along with information about MIDI, are provided on page 57.

Attach the music stand.

Finally, attach the supplied music stand to the P-150 by carefully inserting

it into the groove located along the rear edge of the upper panel.

■ Turning on the Power

After setting up the P-150, you’re ready to turn on the power and begin enjoying

the instrument’s great sounds and many versatile performance and other features.

MIDI Cable

MIDI OUT

MIDI IN

P-150

Sequencer

Switch on the [POWER] button, then gradually raise the [VOLUME] slider until you

obtain a comfortable listening level.

ON/ OFF

POWER

PITCH

MODULATION

MIN

MAX

VOLUME

Always turn the P-150 on first, and

then turn on external MIDI and audio

devices last. However, if a line-level

device is plugged into the P-150’s

[INPUT] jacks, turn it on before

turning on the P-150. When turning

off the power of each device, simply

reverse the process.

GETTING STARTED

■ Playing the Demo Songs

After setting up the P-150 and switching on the power, and before you begin

exploring the instrument’s various features, you may want to listen to the three

preprogrammed Demo songs which demonstrate the P-150’s exceptional sound

and performance capabilities. To do so, follow the steps below.

HOW TO PLAY THE DEMO SONGS

Enter Demo Play mode.

Press the [REVERB] and [MODULATION] buttons simultaneously. The

following screen appears.

Select and play a Demo song.

Immediately after pressing [REVERB] and [MODULATION] (step 1, above), press the

[MODULATION] button once or more to select a Demo song. For example, press the

button once to select the first Demo song (“Song 1 Play”), or twice to select the

second Demo song (“Song 2 Play”), or three times to select the third Demo song

(“Song 3 Play”). The song you select will begin playing automatically.

DEMO

Song 1 Play

HALL

STAGE

ROOM

TREMOLO

SYMPHONIC

CHORUS

REVERB MODULATION

EFFECT

DEMO

Song Select

HALL

STAGE

ROOM

TREMOLO

SYMPHONIC

CHORUS

REVERB MODULATION

EFFECT

If you press the [MODULATION] button four times, the message “Song all”

will appear in the LCD screen, and the P-150 will play all three Demo songs

continuously, one after the other.

If you don’t press the

[MODULATION] button quickly after

having entered Demo Play mode, the

P-150 will automatically exit Demo

Play mode.

DEMO

Song all

GETTING STARTED

You can assign a specific effect to

the [MODULATION] wheel in Edit

mode (see page 51) which is

completely unrelated to the

modulation effects available by

pressing the [MODULATION] button

(see page 23) once or more. Note

that when the vibrato effect is

assigned to the [MODULATION]

wheel, you cannot apply vibrato

modulation to the Piano voices 1 ~ 4.

Also note that the reverb depth or

modulation speed may be set at 0 for

certain voices, and therefore produce

no noticeable effect. (For information

about changing reverb depth, see

page 22. For information about

changing modulation speed, see

page 23.)

Exit Demo Play mode.

If you select “Song 1 Play”, “Song 2 Play” or “Song 3 Play” the P-150 will exit the

Demo Play mode automatically when the selected song finishes playing.

To exit Demo Play mode while a song is playing, simply press the [REVERB] button.

HALL

STAGE

ROOM

TREMOLO

SYMPHONIC

CHORUS

REVERB MODULATION

EFFECT

You cannot enter Demo Play mode

(or any other Play mode) when the P-

150 is in Edit mode. (The LED above

the [EDIT] button will blink when the

P-150 is in Edit mode.) To exit Edit

mode, simply press the [EDIT] button.

Also note that you will not be able to

play the P-150 or use any of the Edit

mode functions while a Demo song is

playing.

■Playing the Voices

Selecting and playing the voices of a new P-150 is simple, since by default the

instrument starts up for the first time in Voice Play mode with initialized parameter

settings, PIANO 1 voice selected.

Therefore, all you have to do is press a [VOICE SELECT] button and start playing

the keyboard. Take a few minutes and try playing each of the voices and notice

the rich quality and dimension of the P-150’s AWM sound, complete with the

nuance of natural expression via the keyboard.

As you play, try out the [PITCH] wheel, which lets you bend notes up or down.

Also try out the [MODULATION] wheel, which lets you add varying degrees of

vibrato (or other effects) to the voices.

While you’re at it, try out the various reverb and modulation effects, by pressing

the [REVERB] and [MODULATION] buttons once or more.

When you’re ready for more, turn the page, and find out about all the P-150 has in

store.

VOICE PLAY MODE

ENTERING AND EXITING VOICE PLAY MODE

Press the [VOICE] button.

When you press the [VOICE] button while the P-150 is in Performance Play

mode, the LED above the [VOICE] button starts blinking, indicating that

Voice Play mode is standing by waiting to be activated.

Press a [VOICE SELECT] button.

As soon as a [VOICE SELECT] button is pressed, Voice Play Single mode is

activated.

The LED above the [VOICE] button and the selected [VOICE SELECT]

button will light.

From within Single mode you can easily activate Dual mode (see page 26)

or Split mode (see page 28).

To exit Voice Play mode, simply enter Performance Play mode. For details,

see page 38.

VOICE

SYSTEM

MIDI FILTER PC TABLE CHANNEL LOCAL CS FC PS N

PIANO 1

1234567

PIANO 2 PIANO 3 PIANO 4 E.PIANO 1 E.PIANO 2 E.PIANO 3 V

VOICE PLAY MODE

■ Single Mode

When the P-150 is in Single mode, you can select and play any one of the 12

voices over the full range of the keyboard. You can also apply and adjust reverb

and modulation effects, and adjust the graphic equalizer settings.

In Single mode, the LED above the currently selected [VOICE SELECT] button

lights, and the name of the currently selected Single voice appears in the LCD

screen.

SELECTING A SINGLE VOICE

Press a [VOICE SELECT] button.

To select a voice you need only press any of the 12 [VOICE SELECT] buttons.

Voices and Polyphony

The P-150’s voices are high quality samples of real musical instruments

generated by Yamaha’s exclusive AWM (Advanced Wave Memory) tone

generation process.

All of the voices have 32-note polyphony, which means that a maximum

number of 32 notes can be played simultaneously. This is crucial for achieving

uncompromising sound and performance when using a sustain pedal, where

certain notes must hold over others as you play, until you release the sustain

pedal.

There is an extra dimension to some of the P-150’s voices. Two of the PIANO

voices have special stereo settings, which are capable of 16-note polyphonic

output. Also, the BASS voice has both ELECTRIC BASS and acoustic

UPRIGHT BASS settings.

The following table provides an overview of each preset AWM voice.

NO. VOICE DESCRIPTION SAMPLE TYPE POLYPHONY

Acoustic grand piano, suitable

1 PIANO 1 for various types of music, Mono / Stereo 32 / 16

from classical to jazz.

Acoustic grand piano, with

2 PIANO 2 sophisticated and deeper Mono / Stereo 32 / 16

resonance and body.

3 PIANO 3

Bright acoustic grand piano,

Mono 32

ideal for rock as well as jazz.

4 PIANO 4

Bright electric grand piano,

Mono 32

ideal for pop ballads.

5 E. PIANO 1

Standard electric piano

Mono 32

with a sharp attack sound.

6 E. PIANO 2

Conventional, all-purpose

Mono 32

electric piano sound.

7 E. PIANO 3

Bright and sparkling,

Mono 32

DX-type electric piano sound.

8 VIBES

Full-bodied vibraphones

Mono 16 (2 layered)

with sharp attack.

Full-set organ combination sound

9 ORGAN 1 with editable footage lengths Mono 8

and other parameters.

10 ORGAN 2 Standard jazz organ sound. Mono 32

11 STRINGS Full orchestral string ensemble. Mono 32

Deep Electric Bass with punch,

12 BASS and full-bodied, resonating Mono 32

Upright Bass.

The Organ 1 voice can be edited and

reconfigured in Edit mode (see page

50).

VOICE PLAY MODE

Once you have modified certain

parameters in Voice Play or

Performance Play mode,

QE (Quick

Edit) will display in the upper right

corner to remind you that you have

modified the original settings.

Parameters include the following:

reverb and modulation setting,

stereo/mono setting for Piano1 and

Piano2, electric/upright setting for

Bass, plus Balance, Dual Detune,

Split, and Transpose settings.

■ Stereo/Mono Piano

Pressing and holding the [PIANO 1] (or [PIANO 2]) button for a few moments

alternately selects the stereo and mono settings.

The initial default setting for the PIANO 1 (and PIANO 2) voice is stereo, and

polyphony is 16 notes.

CHANGING THE PIANO VOICE SETTING

Press and hold [PIANO 1] (or [PIANO 2]) for a few moments.

After a moment, the MONO screen briefly appears.

As you play the keyboard, the output of the PIANO 1 voice will be in mono, and

polyphony will be 32 notes.

To return the PIANO 1 voice to its stereo setting, simply press and hold [PIANO 1]

for a few moments again. The STEREO screen briefly appears.

■ Electric/Upright Bass

Pressing and holding the [BASS] button for a few moments alternately selects the

Electric and Upright settings.

The initial default setting for the BASS voice is Electric Bass.

CHANGING THE BASS VOICE SETTING

Press and hold [BASS] for a few moments.

After a moment, the UPRIGHT BASS screen briefly appears.

Piano1 16/32 QE

mono

Piano1 16/32 QE

stereo

Elec./Upright QE

Upright Bass

SYSTEM MIDI FILTER

PIANO 1

PIANO 2

INT.EQ

BASS

VOICE PLAY MODE

As you play the keyboard, you will hear the Upright Bass voice.

To change back to the ELECTRIC BASS voice, simply press and hold [BASS] for a

few moments again. The ELECTRIC BASS screen briefly appears.

■Reverb Effects

The P-150’s internal DSP digital signal processor generates three types of realistic

reverb effects, or simulated ambient environments, which you can apply to the

voices.

These include ROOM, which simulates the natural reverberations of sound in a

normal-sized room, STAGE, which simulates the natural reverberations of sound

in a night club, and HALL, which simulates the natural reverberations of sound in a

relatively large concert hall.

As you select each voice you will notice that a specific reverb effect is already

assigned to it, indicated by a lit LED to the left of the name of the selected reverb

type. These are the initial default assignments set at the factory, but you can select

any reverb effect you wish for each voice, or even turn the reverb effect off. You

can also change reverb depth on the spot.

SELECTING A REVERB TYPE

Press the [REVERB] button once or more.

When you press the [REVERB] button repeatedly, the reverb types will be selected

in order as follows: ROOM, STAGE, HALL, then OFF.

(No lit LED represents Off status.)

Note that each time you select a reverb type, a message will briefly display in the

LCD screen, as follows.

This temporary message displays the current depth level for the reverb type that

you just selected, between 0 and 7.

You can easily change the depth level for the currently selected reverb type.

REVERB DEPTH QE

2 <>

Elec./Upright QE

Elec.Bass

HALL

STAGE

ROOM

TREMOLO

SYMPHONIC

CHORUS

REVERB MODULATION

EFFECT

You can also select the reverb type

and depth settings in Edit mode (see

page 52).

VOICE PLAY MODE

CHANGING REVERB DEPTH

Hold the [REVERB] button and move the [DATA ENTRY] slider

(or press [–1/NO] or [+1/YES]).

As soon as you move the [DATA ENTRY] slider (or press [–1/NO] or

[+1/YES]) the REVERB DEPTH screen appears.

If you move the [DATA ENTRY] slider upward, the depth level increases; if

you move the [DATA ENTRY] slider downward, the depth level decreases.

A value of 7 will produce the largest number of reverberations, whereas a

value of 0 will effectively turn the reverb off.

Release the [REVERB] button.

After a moment, the voice name will reappear in the screen.

Try different settings and play the keyboard and notice the difference

between high and low reverb depth level settings, and the P-150’s wide

variety of reverb options.

-1/NO +1/YES

PS1 PS2

DATA ENTRY

HALL

STAGE

ROOM

TREMOLO

SYMPHONIC

CHORUS

REVERB MODULATION

EFFECT

■ Modulation Effects

The P-150’s internal DSP digital signal processor generates three types of

modulation effects which you can apply to the voices. (Note: These modulation

effects are unrelated to the vibrato effect which you can apply to voices using the

[MODULATION] wheel. For details about the vibrato effect, see page 52.)

These include CHORUS, a modulated delay which effectively makes a voice

sound like more than one instrument is being played, SYMPHONIC, a more

pronounced chorus effect, and TREMOLO, a rotating speaker effect.

As you select each voice you will notice that most have a specific modulation

effect already assigned to them, indicated by a lit LED to the left of the name of the

selected modulation effect type. These are the initial default assignments set at the

factory, but you can select any modulation effect you wish for each voice, or even

turn the modulation effect off. You can also change modulation speed on the spot.

SELECTING A MODULATION TYPE

Press the [MODULATION] button once or more.

When you press the [MODULATION] button repeatedly, the modulation types will

be selected in order as follows: CHORUS, SYMPHONIC, TREMOLO, then OFF.

(No lit LED represents Off status.)

HALL

STAGE

ROOM

TREMOLO

SYMPHONIC

CHORUS

REVERB MODULATION

EFFECT

In Voice Play mode, a different reverb

type and depth can be selected for

each voice. When you play two

voices in either Dual or Split mode,

the P-150 will apply the main voice

reverb type and depth setting to both

voices, and ignore any settings which

you may have made for the sub

voice. For more information about

main and sub voices, see page 25.

You can also select the modulation

type and speed settings in Edit mode

(see page 52).

VOICE PLAY MODE

A different modulation type and

speed can be selected for each

voice. When you play two voices in

either Dual or Split mode, the P-150

will apply the main voice modulation

type and speed setting to both

voices, and ignore any settings which

you may have made for the sub

voice. For more information about

main and sub voices, see page 25.

Note that each time you select a modulation type, a message will briefly

display in the LCD screen, as follows.

This temporary message displays the current speed level for the modulation

type that you just selected, between 0 and 7. You can easily change the

speed level for the currently selected modulation type.

CHANGING MODULATION SPEED

Hold the [MODULATION] button and move the [DATA ENTRY]

slider (or press [–1/NO] or [+1/YES]).

As soon as you move the [DATA ENTRY] slider (or press [–1/NO] or

[+1/YES]) the MODULATION SPEED screen appears.

If you move the [DATA ENTRY] slider upward, the speed level increases; if

you move the [DATA ENTRY] slider downward, the speed level decreases.

A value of 7 will produce the largest number of modulations, whereas a

value of 0 will effectively turn the modulation off.

Release the [MODULATION] button.

After a moment, the voice name will reappear in the screen.

Try different settings and play the keyboard and notice the difference

between high and low modulation speed level settings.

-1/NO +1/YES

PS1 PS2

DATA ENTRY

HALL

STAGE

ROOM

TREMOLO

SYMPHONIC

CHORUS

REVERB MODULATION

EFFECT

MOD SPEED QE

VOICE PLAY MODE

ADJUSTING THE EQUALIZATION

Move an [EQUALIZER] slider up or down.

Move either the [LOW], [MIDDLE] or [HIGH] slider upward to increase the level of

output for that range, or move it downward to decrease the level of output for that

range.

The graph below shows how the equalizer modifies the sound output of each range.

■Main and Sub Voices

The P-150 is capable of generating two different AWM voices at once, either in

Dual mode or Split mode. These are divided into main and sub voice areas of the

keyboard which can be assigned to either end of the keyboard.

In Dual mode, the order that you press the [SELECT] buttons will determine which

voice is the main voice and which is the sub voice. Since both voices are sounded

simultaneously, the distinction between the main voice and sub voice is not

important when you play the keyboard, but you’ll need to keep it in mind when

setting the detune relationship and balance levels. (For details about Dual mode,

see page 26.)

In Split mode, the main and sub voices each are assigned to separate areas of the

keyboard, known as the main and sub keyboard areas. The two keyboard areas

are separated at a specified key known as the split point. You can determine the

split point, assign the main and sub voices to either end of the keyboard, and

adjust the volume balance of the two voices in relation to each other. In general,

the main keyboard area is normally above the split point; however, there may be

cases when you’ll want to play the main voice below the split point. (For details

about Split mode, see page 28.)

Note that when you play two voices in either Dual or Split mode, the P-150 will

apply the main voice reverb type and depth setting and modulation type and speed

setting to both voices, and ignore any settings which you may have made for the

sub voice.

■Panel Equalizer

The P-150’s three-band equalizer works just like a graphic equalizer found on

many home stereo amplifiers. The three sliders provide direct access to the P-

150’s output in LOW, MIDDLE and HIGH frequency ranges, which gives you

considerable control over the quality of the sound.

flat (normal)

HIGHMIDDLELOW

EQUALIZER

maximum

minimum

LOW MIDDLE

NORMAL

HIGH

An Internal Equalizer accessible in

Edit mode lets you adjust the

frequency ranges for each voice. For

details, see page 52.

VOICE PLAY MODE

■Dual Mode

When the P-150 is in Dual mode, you can play two voices at the same time—a

main voice and a sub voice—over the full range of the keyboard. For example, you

can blend electric piano and strings sounds together to add depth and texture to a

melody line.

You can adjust the volume balance of the Dual voices in relation to each other, as

well as detune the voices in order to enrich the sound by bringing out the individual

characteristics of each Dual voice. You can also transpose each Dual voice (for

details, see page 35).

In Dual mode, voice polyphony is

determined by the voices you select.

For example, if you select two 32-

note polyphonic voices, polyphony

will be reduced to 16 notes. If you

select a 32-note voice and a 16-note

(stereo) voice, polyphony will be

reduced to 10 notes. Likewise, if you

select two 16-note (stereo) voices,

polyphony will be reduced to 8 notes.

ENTERING AND EXITING DUAL MODE

Main Voice: Press and hold a [VOICE SELECT] button.

Sub Voice: While still holding the first button, simply press

another [VOICE SELECT] button.

The LED above each [VOICE SELECT] button lights, and those two voices

will sound when you play the keyboard.

The order that you press the buttons will determine which voice is the main

voice and which voice is the sub voice. For example, if you press and hold

[E. PIANO 3] and then press [STRINGS], the ELECTRIC PIANO 3 voice will

be the main voice, and the STRINGS voice will be the sub voice.

In Dual mode, since both voices are sounded simultaneously, the distinction

between the main voice and sub voice is not important when you play the

keyboard. However, you will want to keep it in mind when adjusting the voice

balance and detune settings, as described below.

When you select voices in Dual mode, the P-150 will apply the main voice

reverb type and depth setting and modulation type and speed setting to both

voices, and ignore any settings which you may have made for the sub voice.

Also, [PITCH] and [MODULATION] wheels apply to both voices equally, with

the values as set for the main voice.

To exit Dual mode, simply press a single [VOICE SELECT] button to return

to Single mode, or press [SPLIT] and enter Split mode.

SYSTEM MIDI FILTER PC TABLE CHANNEL LOCAL CS FC PS NAME ORGAN

COMBINATION

PB MW KBD SENS. INT. EQ

PIANO 1

123456789101112

PIANO 2 PIANO 3 PIANO 4 E.PIANO 1 E.PIANO 2 E.PIANO 3 VIBES ORGAN1 ORGAN2 STRINGS BASS

[ VOICE ]

E.P.3 +Strings

Main Voice Sub Voice

In Dual mode you cannot select the

Organ 1 voice.

VOICE PLAY MODE

ADJUSTING THE BALANCE OF THE DUAL VOICES

Hold the [BALANCE] button and move the [DATA ENTRY] slider.

As you move the [DATA ENTRY] slider, the DUAL BALANCE screen appears.

Moving the slider upwards increases the level of the main voice while

decreasing the level of the sub voice. Conversely, moving the slider

downwards increases the level of the sub voice while decreasing the level of

the main voice. You can set the balance to any value between -16 and 15.

Two indicators to the right of the numeric value display the relative balance

of sub and main voices.

DUAL BALANCE QE

0..

Sub Main

BALANCE

SPLIT

DATA ENTRY

You’ll find it convenient to set the desired balance by holding the [BALANCE]

button and moving the [DATA ENTRY] slider with one hand, and then

playing the keyboard with the other hand.

Release the [BALANCE] button.

After a moment, the Dual voice names will reappear in the screen.

If you choose different Dual voices, the balance relationship will remain the

same as determined above, until you change the balance setting again.

DETUNING THE DUAL VOICES

Hold the [DETUNE] button and move the [DATA ENTRY] slider.

As you hold the [DETUNE] button, do not press a key on the keyboard until

you move the [DATA ENTRY] slider. (Note: If you press a key on the

keyboard before moving the [DATA ENTRY] slider, you will change the

Transpose setting. For information about the Transpose feature, see page 33.)

DATA ENTRY

DETUNE

TRANSPOSE

In this case you cannot use the

[–1/NO] and [+1/YES] buttons to

change data.

VOICE PLAY MODE

As you move the [DATA ENTRY] slider, the DUAL DETUNE screen appears.

You can set the detune to any value between 0 (no detuning) and 7

(maximum detuning). Moving the slider upwards increases the detune value.

Conversely, moving the slider downwards decreases the detune value.

DUAL DETUNE QE

4/\

Release the [DETUNE] button.

After a moment, the Dual voice names will reappear in the screen.

If you select different Dual voices, the detune relationship will remain the

same as determined above, until you change the detune setting again.

● Main and Sub Voice Detune Relationship

When you detune two voices in Dual mode, the main voice is raised above the

keyboard’s standard pitch by a certain amount and the sub voice is lowered below

the keyboard’s standard pitch by an equal amount. The result is that the individual

characteristics of each Dual voice are emphasized. The amount of pitch

adjustment depends on the value you select. At the maximum detune setting, the

voices are each detuned by about one-third of a semitone.

■Split Mode

When the P-150 is in Split mode, you can play two voices at the same time—one

voice on the left side of the keyboard, and another voice on the right side of the

keyboard. For example, you can play a strings pad with one hand, while playing a

piano melody with the other; or you can play an electric bass line with your left

hand, while playing an organ riff with your right hand.

The two voices you play in Split mode are referred to as the main and sub voices.

These voices are assigned to separate areas of the keyboard, known as the main

and sub keyboard areas, which are separated at a specific key known as the split

point.

You can determine the split point and assign the main and sub voices to either end

of the keyboard. You can also adjust the volume balance of the two voices in

relation to each other (for details, see page 30.)

In this case you cannot use the

[–1/NO] and [+1/YES] buttons to

change data.

VOICE PLAY MODE

If you enter Split mode directly from

Dual mode, and then choose the

Organ 1 voice as the main voice,

when you press the [SPLIT] button to

exit Split mode, the P-150 will

automatically switch to Single mode.

In Split mode, the [PITCH] and

[MODULATION] wheels, as well as

the sustain, soft and sostenuto

pedals, will only affect the main voice.

ENTERING AND EXITING SPLIT MODE

Press the [SPLIT] button.

When you press the [SPLIT] button, the LED above it will light, and the keyboard

will split into two areas, one playing the main voice you selected in Single or Dual

mode, and the other playing the voice which was last selected as the Split mode

sub voice. (ELECTRIC BASS is the default sub voice designated at the factory.)

The current split point designation and keyboard area assignments briefly

appear in the screen.

The first line of the above screen indicates that the current split point area is

designated at key C2 (the initial default setting). The second line indicates

that the sub voice is assigned to the left side of the split point, while the main

voice is assigned to the right side of the split point.

After a few moments, the names of two voices will appear in the LCD screen.

The P-150 will now play the two voices using the current split point

designation and keyboard area assignments.

To exit Split mode, simply press the [SPLIT] button again. The P-150 will

return to Single or Dual mode, depending on which one was active before

you entered Split mode, playing the voice you have selected as the main

voice.

SPLIT POINT=C 2

KBD AREA=Sub/Man

Left side Right side

Current split point

[VOICE]

Bass / Piano1

Sub Voice Main Voice

BALANCE

SPLIT

Split Point (included in main area)

Sub Voice (C2) Main Voice

VOICE PLAY MODE

SELECTING SPLIT VOICES

Main Voice: Press a [VOICE SELECT] button.

When you press the [SPLIT] button to enter Split mode, the voice you were

playing in Single mode (or the main voice you were playing in Dual mode)

will be assigned by default to the main keyboard area.

To change the main voice, simply press any [VOICE SELECT] button, the

same as you would in Single mode.

Sub Voice: Hold the [SPLIT] button and press a [VOICE SELECT] button.

Note that you can assign the same voice to both main and sub keyboard

areas. This is useful in such cases where you want to use the same voice on

each end of the keyboard, but with different Transpose settings (for details,

see page 33), or at different volume balance levels.

You’ll find it convenient that the procedure for selecting voices is separate

from that for entering and leaving Split mode, since this lets you switch the

sub keyboard area on and off as needed. For example, you can play the

main voice in Single Play mode (or Dual voices) across the entire keyboard

during a song’s verse and chorus, then switch into Split mode to add the sub

voice for an intricate two-part solo, then switch the Split mode off to play

remaining verses and choruses.

ADJUSTING THE BALANCE OF THE SPLIT VOICES

Hold the [BALANCE] button and move the [DATA ENTRY] slider.

As you move the [DATA ENTRY] slider, the SPLIT BALANCE screen appears.

SPLIT BALANCE QE

..0

Sub Main

SYSTEM MIDI FILTER PC TABLE CHANNEL LOCAL CS FC PS NAME ORGAN

COMBINATION

PB MW KBD SENS. INT.EQ

PIANO 1

123456789101112

PIANO 2 PIANO 3 PIANO 4 E.PIANO 1 E.PIANO 2 E.PIANO 3 VIBES ORGAN1 ORGAN2 STRINGS BASS

SYSTEM MIDI FILTER PC TABLE CHANNEL LOCAL CS FC PS NAME ORGAN

COMBINATION

PB MW KBD SENS. INT.EQ

PIANO 1

123456789101112

PIANO 2 PIANO 3 PIANO 4 E.PIANO 1 E.PIANO 2 E.PIANO 3 VIBES ORGAN1 ORGAN2 STRINGS BASS

BALANCE

SPLIT

BALANCE

SPLIT

VOICE PLAY MODE

Moving the slider upwards increases the level of the main voice while decreasing

the level of the sub voice. Conversely, moving the slider downwards increases the

level of the sub voice while decreasing the level of the main voice. You can set the

balance to any value between -16 and 15. Two indicators to the right of the

numeric value display the relative balance of sub and main voices.

Release the [BALANCE] button.

After a moment, the Split voice names will reappear in the screen.

If you choose different Split voices, the balance relationship will remain the

same as determined above, until you change the balance setting again.

CHANGING THE SPLIT POINT

Hold the [SPLIT] button and press a key on the keyboard.

The key that you press will become the new split point. The SPLIT POINT

screen appears.

As long as you hold the [SPLIT] button, the note name of the key that you

pressed will blink; pressing another key will change the split point still again,

and the name of the new split point will likewise appear in the screen.

You can also raise or lower the current split point setting one semitone at a

time by holding the [SPLIT] button and pressing the [–1/NO] or [+1/YES]

buttons.

SPLIT POINT QE

G 3

In this case you cannot use the

[–1/NO] and [+1/YES] buttons to

change data.

BALANCE

SPLIT

(G3)

VOICE PLAY MODE

Release the [SPLIT] button.

After a moment, the Split voice names will reappear in the screen.

The split point will remain where you set it until you change it again, even if

you exit and reenter Split mode.

As you change the split point you can specify whether the main voice will

play above or below the split point.

In general, the main keyboard area is normally above the split point;

however, there may be cases when you’ll want to play the main voice below

the split point. For example, say you’re playing a song where the verses and

choruses call for a piano in the bass and strings on top, and an instrumental

part calls for a piano solo that sweeps from one end of the keyboard to

another. You can do this by selecting the piano as the main voice and

assigning it to the lower keyboard area. You will then be able to switch from

Split mode for the verses and choruses to Single mode form the solo, then

back to split mode again, simply by pressing the [SPLIT] button.

CHANGING MAIN AND SUB KEYBOARD AREAS

Hold the [SPLIT] button, then press and hold the split point

key.

Press a second key below or above the split point key.

The SPLIT AREA screen appears.

As you hold the [SPLIT] button and split point key, pressing a second key

below the split point will designate the left area of the keyboard as the main

area. Pressing a second key above the split point will again designate the

right area of the keyboard as the main area.

Note that the key that you press to select the split point will always be

included in the main keyboard area. Thus, if you select F4 as the split point

and then set the main keyboard area below this point, the main voice will

play all notes up to and including F4, whereas the sub voice will play all

notes from F#4 on. If you set the main keyboard area above this point,

however, the sub voice will play all notes up to E4, and the main voice will

play all notes from F4 on.

SPLIT AREA QE

Main/Sub

When you select voices in Split

mode, the P-150 will apply the main

voice reverb type and depth setting

and modulation type and speed

setting to both voices, and ignore any

settings which you may have made

for the sub voice. (For more

information about main and sub

voices, see page 25.)

Main

BALANCE

SPLIT

Press and hold

C3 (Split point key)

B2 (Select key)

Select lower key

D3 (Select key)

Select upper key

Press and hold

Sub Main

Sub

VOICE PLAY MODE

■ Transpose

The P-150 has a multi-faceted transpose feature that lets you transpose the pitch

at the touch of a button while you play.

The P-150 has four independent transpose paths, which let you set transpose

values for the internal main voice as well as the sub voice, and which also let you

set transpose values for the MIDI main and sub voices which will affect external

devices.

Transpose is particularly useful in the Dual and Split modes. In the Dual mode, for

example, you can play two different voices at the same time, each having a

different pitch.

The P-150’s default main voice transpose setting is 12, which means the pitch will

transpose up one octave when you press the [TRANSPOSE] button. The default

sub voice transpose amounts are set to 0 for Dual and Split modes.

USING THE TRANSPOSE FEATURE

Press the [TRANSPOSE] button to transpose the pitch of the keyboard.

The LED above the [TRANSPOSE] button lights and the TRANSPOSE screen with current transpose value appears.

Depending on the current status and mode, the TRANSPOSE screen will be

different. For example, if the P-150 is in Split mode and the MIDI transmit

switch is enabled, the screen will display internal and MIDI main and sub

voice transposition values.

Main voice internal transposition

Sub voice MIDI transposition

Sub voice internal transposition

DETUNE

TRANSPOSE

VOICE PLAY MODE

As you play in Split mode, the pitch of both voices will transpose according

to main and sub voice settings when you press the [TRANSPOSE] button.

You can play two-handed duets with different instruments by transposing the

sub voice up or down two octaves to match the pitch range of the main

voice.

If the P-150 is in Dual mode and the MIDI transmit switch is enabled, the

TRANSPOSE screen will display internal and MIDI main voice and internal

sub voice transposition values.

As you play in Dual mode, the pitch of both voices will transpose according

to independent main and sub voice settings when you press the

[TRANSPOSE] button. Thus, you can create two-note harmonies by

lowering the sub voice so that it plays a fifth or an octave below the main

voice.

If the P-150 is in Single mode and the MIDI transmit switch is enabled, the

TRANSPOSE screen will display internal and MIDI main voice transposition

values.

As you play in Single mode, the pitch of the entire keyboard will transpose

according to the main voice setting when you press the [TRANSPOSE]

button. (The sub voice is not active in Single mode.)

If the MIDI transmit switch is disabled, only the main voice (and sub voice,

depending on mode) transposition value will be displayed.

Press the [TRANSPOSE] button again to return the keyboard

to normal pitch.

The LED above the [TRANSPOSE] button goes out and the keyboard

returns to normal pitch.

SETTING THE TRANSPOSE AMOUNT

When the transpose function is on, hold the [TRANSPOSE]

button and press a key on the keyboard.

The key that you press becomes the new transpose amount. The TRANSPOSE screen appears.

DETUNE

TRANSPOSE

TRANSPOSE QE

MAIN +12

VOICE PLAY MODE

In this case you cannot use the [CS]

slider to change the transpose value.

(Trying to do so in Dual mode will

activate the detune function.)

When the transpose setting exceeds

the legal range (A–1 ~ C7) the P-150

plays and repeats the one octave

higher (or lower) range. Also note

that MIDI notes will not be transmitted

if the data exceeds MIDI note values

0 ~ 127.

C3 (middle C) is the normal pitch, or 0 value, so all you need to do is press

any key above or below C3 to set the transpose amount. For example, if you

want the transpose amount to be one octave below normal keyboard pitch,

simply press C2. To return the transpose amount to normal pitch, simply

press C3 again.

You can also change the transpose amount setting one semitone at a time

by holding the [TRANSPOSE] button and pressing the [–1/NO] and [+1/YES]

buttons.

You can set the transpose amount anywhere within a range of four octaves,

from -24 (C1) to 24 (C5). If you try to set the transpose amount by pressing a

key below C1 or above C5 on the keyboard, the P-150 will react as though

you pressed C1 or C5.

Release the [TRANSPOSE] button.

The P-150 will assume that you want to transpose using this value, and

leave the transpose function turned on after you complete the setting.

In a similar way, internal sub voice and MIDI transpose signals for the MIDI

main and sub voice can be set independently, as explained below.

INTERNAL SPLIT SUB VOICE:

To set the transpose value for the internal

split sub voice, in Split mode, press and hold [TRANSPOSE], then hold [SPLIT], then

press a key on the keyboard (or press the [–1/NO] or [+1/YES] buttons).

INTERNAL DUAL SUB VOICE: To set the transpose value for the internal

dual sub voice, in Dual mode, press and hold [TRANSPOSE], then hold [SPLIT], then

press a key on the keyboard (or press the [–1/NO] or [+1/YES] buttons).

BALANCE

SPLIT

DETUNE

TRANSPOSE

TRANSPOSE QE

SPLIT SUB +12

TRANSPOSE QE

DUAL SUB +12

VOICE PLAY MODE

■MIDI Transmit Enable

You can enable or disable MIDI transmission by pressing the [MIDI] button. The

LED above the [MIDI] button remains lit while this function is enabled.

It will not block the reception of data from the [MIDI IN] jack.

Note that you cannot enable transmission if the [MIDI] button has been turned off.

Also note that setting (in Edit mode) the MIDI transmit channel to Off and setting

all the MIDI Filters to On will have the same effect as disabling the MIDI transmit

switch. The significance in this case is that turning the [MIDI] button off affects all

of the Performances, whereas the aforementioned Edit mode settings can be

assigned to individual Performances.

For details about the P-150’s MIDI capabilities, see page 57.

MIDI MAIN VOICE: To set the transpose value for the MIDI main voice, press

and hold [TRANSPOSE], then hold [MIDI], then press a key on the keyboard (or

press the [ –1/NO] or [+1/YES] buttons).

MIDI SUB VOICE: To set the transpose value for the MIDI sub voice, press and

hold [TRANSPOSE], followed by [SPLIT], then [MIDI], then press a key on the

keyboard (or press the [–1/NO] or [+1/YES] buttons).

TRANSPOSE QE

MIDI SUB +12

DETUNE

TRANSPOSE

PAGE

MIDI

1 2

TRANSPOSE QE

MIDI MAIN +12

PAGE

MIDI

When changing the internal main or

sub voice’s transpose value, the MIDI

main or sub voice will change

accordingly.

PAGE

MIDI

BALANCE

SPLIT

DETUNE

TRANSPOSE

321

VOICE PLAY MODE

■MIDI Panic

Although MIDI is very reliable, it is in fact so sophisticated that it is not without its

occasional faults. For example, sometimes a connected tone generator or

synthesizer responds to a Note On message, but not a Note Off message, thus

causing a note to get stuck, which can be quite frustrating, especially in a live

performance setting.

Unexpected sustained notes, sudden losses of volume, and “hanging” pitch bends

are also common MIDI problems that can happen when using a sequencer with

the P-150 and other MIDI instruments.

The P-150’s MIDI Panic feature lets you instantly send note off and other

messages to all connected MIDI devices.

ACTIVATING MIDI PANIC

Hold the [MIDI] button, then press the [REVERB] and

[MODULATION] buttons at the same time.

The MIDI PANIC SEND screen appears briefly when MIDI Panic is activated.

When MIDI Panic is activated, the following messages are sent in sequence over

all MIDI channels: All Notes Off; All Sounds Off; Channel Pressure off; Sustain

Pedal Off; Modulation Off; Pitch Bend (Center); Reset All Controllers.

MIDI Panic has no effect during sending/receiving bulk data or while MIDI Merge is

on.

PAGE

MIDI

HALL

STAGE

ROOM

TREMOLO

SYMPHONIC

CHORUS

REVERB MODULATION

EFFECT

MIDI PANIC

SEND

PERFORMANCE PLAY MODE

ENTERING AND EXITING PERFORMANCE PLAY MODE

Press the [PERF. A] or [PERF. B] button.

If you press the [PERF. A] button, the LED above it will start blinking to indicate that

the P-150 is standing by to enter the PERFORMANCE-A bank. Likewise, if you press

the [PERF. B] button, the LED above it will start blinking to indicate that the P-150 is

standing by to enter the PERFORMANCE-B bank.

Press a [PERFORMANCE SELECT] button.

Pressing a [PERFORMANCE SELECT] button activates Performance

mode. The LEDs above the [PERFORMANCE SELECT] and [PERF.]

buttons light, and the name of the Performance appears in the LCD screen.

To exit Performance Play mode, simply press the [VOICE] button, followed

by a [VOICE SELECT] button, which will return you to Voice Play mode.

SYSTEM MIDI FILTER PC TABLE CHANNEL LOCAL CS FC PS NAME

PIANO 1

12345678

PIANO 2 PIANO 3 PIANO 4 E.PIANO 1 E.PIANO 2 E.PIANO 3 VIBES

VOICE

PERF.B

PERF.A

PERF.B

PERF.A

PERFORMANCE<A01>

Piano 1

PERFORMANCE PLAY MODE

SELECTING A PERFORMANCE

Press a [PERFORMANCE SELECT] button.

Pressing any of the 12 [PERFORMANCE SELECT] buttons will access a

Performance in the currently selected Performance bank. The name of the

Performance appears in the LCD screen.

The P-150 comes with 24 Preset Performances designed for various musical

purposes. Take a moment and try out each one in both A and B banks. For a list of

the Preset Performances, see page 64.

Just as in Voice Play mode, Performance Play mode lets you select Single voices

as well as activate Dual mode and Split mode.

■Selecting Single Voices

Within Performance Play mode you can easily select Single voices in the current

Performance. The procedure is slightly different than in Voice Play mode.

SELECTING SINGLE VOICES IN

PERFORMANCE PLAY MODE

Hold the [EDIT] button, then press a [VOICE SELECT] button.

The name of the voice appears in the LCD screen.

SYSTEM MIDI FILTER PC TABLE CHANNEL LOCAL CS FC PS NAME ORGAN

COMBINATION

PB MW KBD SENS. INT.EQ

PIANO 1

123456789101112

PIANO 2 PIANO 3 PIANO 4 E.PIANO 1 E.PIANO 2 E.PIANO 3 VIBES ORGAN1 ORGAN2 STRINGS BASS

EDIT

PERFORMANCE<A01>

Piano 1

Only a single set of Voice parameters

is available for each Performance.

Therefore, the Voice parameters set

for one voice will also be effective

when you select other voices.

In Peformance Play mode, a lit LED

above a voice button does not

indicate the selected voice(s). It

indicates the currently selected

performance.

PERFORMANCE PLAY MODE

■ Selecting Dual Voices

Within Performance Play mode you can easily select Dual voices in the current

Performance. The procedure is slightly different than in Voice Play mode.

SELECTING DUAL VOICES IN

PERFORMANCE PLAY MODE

Hold the [EDIT] button, then press two [VOICE SELECT] buttons.

This activates Dual mode from within Performance Play mode. The names of the

voices appear in the LCD screen.

Note that the order in which you press the [VOICE SELECT] buttons

determines the main and sub voices, just as in Voice Play mode. For details,

see Dual Mode, page 26.

■ Selecting Split Voices

Within Performance Play mode you can easily select Split voices in the current

Performance. The procedure is slightly different than in Voice Play mode.

SELECTING SPLIT VOICES IN

PERFORMANCE PLAY MODE

Press the [SPLIT] button.

This activates Split mode from within Performance Play mode. The names of

the voices appear in the LCD screen.

SYSTEM MIDI FILTER PC TABLE CHANNEL LOCAL CS FC PS NAME ORGAN

COMBINATION

PB MW KBD SENS. INT.EQ

PIANO 1

123456789101112

PIANO 2 PIANO 3 PIANO 4 E.PIANO 1 E.PIANO 2 E.PIANO 3 VIBES ORGAN1 ORGAN2 STRINGS BASS

EDIT

PERFORMANCE<A01>

Piano1 +Strings

BALANCE

SPLIT

PERFORMANCE PLAY MODE

Main Voice: Hold the [EDIT] button, then press a [VOICE

SELECT] button.

Sub Voice: Hold the [SPLIT] button and press a [VOICE

SELECT] button.

SYSTEM MIDI FILTER PC TABLE CHANNEL LOCAL CS FC PS NAME ORGAN

COMBINATION

PB MW KBD SENS. INT EQ

PIANO 1

123456789101112

PIANO 2 PIANO 3 PIANO 4 E.PIANO 1 E.PIANO 2 E.PIANO 3 VIBES ORGAN1 ORGAN2 STRINGS BASS

BALANCE

SPLIT

PERFORMANCE<A01>

Bass / Piano1

SYSTEM MIDI FILTER PC TABLE CHANNEL LOCAL CS FC PS NAME ORGAN

COMBINATION

PB MW KBD SENS. INT.EQ

PIANO 1

123456789101112

PIANO 2 PIANO 3 PIANO 4 E.PIANO 1 E.PIANO 2 E.PIANO 3 VIBES ORGAN1 ORGAN2 STRINGS BASS

EDIT

EDIT MODE

10. PITCH BEND (PB)/MODULATION WHEEL (MW)

Page 1.PB RANGE

2.MW ASSIGN

11. KEYBOARD SENSITIVITY

Page 1.KEYBOARD SENSITIVITY INTERNAL

2.KEYBOARD SENSITIVITY MIDI

3.KEYBOARD RANGE

MIN/MAX

12. INTERNAL EQUALIZER

Page 1.EQ

LOW *

MID *

HIGH *

REVERB

Page 1.REVERB TYPE

TYPE *

DEPTH *

MODULATION

Page 1.MODULATION TYPE

TYPE *

SPEED *

VOICE MENUS

SYSTEM MENUS

1. SYSTEM

Page 1.MASTER TUNE

2.REVERB

3.DEVICE NUMBER

4.MIDI MERGE

5.PERFORMANCE ENABLE

MIDI CHANNEL *

LOCAL *

CONTROLLER ASSIGN *

6.POPUP TIME

PROGRAM CHANGE *

OTHERS *

7.STORE TYPE

2. MIDI FILTER

Page 1.TRANSMIT FILTER

MESSAGE TYPE *

ON/OFF *

2.RECEIVE FILTER

MESSAGE TYPE *

ON/OFF *

3. PROGRAM CHANGE TABLE

Page 1.PROGRAM CHANGE TRANSMIT

VOICE/PERFORMANCE NO. *

MSB/LSB *

PROGRAM CHANGE NUMBER *

2.PROGRAM CHANGE RECEIVE

PROGRAM CHANGE NUMBER *

VOICE/PERFORMANCE NO. *

PERFORMANCE MENUS

4. CHANNEL

Page 1.CHANNEL

TRANSMIT *

RECEIVE *

5. LOCAL

Page 1.LOCAL

6. CONTINUOUS SLIDER(CS) / FOOT CONTROLLER(FC)

Page 1.CS ASSIGN

2.CS RANGE

MIN/MAX *

3.FC ASSIGN

4.FC RANGE

MIN/MAX *

7. PANEL SWITCH (PS)

Page 1.PANEL SWITCH 1 ASSIGN

2.PANEL SWITCH 2 ASSIGN

8. NAME

Page 1.PERFORMANCE NAME

CHARACTER SELECT (16 characters) *

9. ORGAN COMBINATION

Page 1.FOOTAGE

8 FOOTAGE TYPES *

2.RESPONSE, ATTACK

RESPONSE, 3 ATTACK TYPES, ATTACK LENGTH/MODE *

■ Edit Menu Tree

Edit mode lets you access and edit functions related to

System parameters (1. ~ 3.), Performance parameters (4. ~

9.) and Voice parameters (10. ~ 12. plus REVERB and

MODULATION).

The Edit Menu Tree below outlines the Edit mode functions

and pages. (Pages can be selected with the [PAGE] button

or by pressing the specific [EDIT SELECT] button

continually. Items marked with an asterisk* can be selected

using the [1]/[q] buttons.)

SELECTING AN EDIT FUNCTION

Press an [EDIT SELECT] button.

The LED above the button you press starts blinking, and the

name of the currently active parameter page appears in the

LCD screen.

SELECTING EDIT FUNCTION PAGES

Press the [PAGE] button once or more.

Each time you press the [PAGE] button a page will appear in

the LCD screen.

You can also select Edit function pages by pressing the

same [EDIT SELECT] button once or more. For example, if

you select the System function, you can simply press the

[SYSTEM] button as many times as necessary to access the

System function page you want.

The name of each page, as well as the accessible

parameters within it, appears in the LCD screen as you step

through the pages.

EDITING PARAMETERS

Note that some pages contain several parameters, which

you can access with the cursor buttons. (See asterisk* items

on the Edit Menu Tree, page 42.)

If necessary, press the [<] or [>] buttons to

position the cursor over the desired

parameter.

The currently selected parameter will blink on and off

in the LCD screen.

EDIT MODE

The Edit function page numbers appear in the upper right corner of the

screen. When Non Auto Store is selected and Edit mode is engaged, the

letter S, P or V will appear to the right of the page number to indicate

which type of parameters you are editing System, Performance or Voice

parameters, respectively.

Channel, Local, CS FC and PS settings are basically classified as

Performance parameters, though they are treated as System parameters

when Sys is selected for MIDI Channel, Local or Controller Assign in the

Performance Enable function (System Menu), see page 45. When Sys

has been selected, the letter S will appear to the right of the page

number, replacing the letter P.

ENTERING AND EXITING EDIT MODE

Press the [EDIT] button.

The LED above the [EDIT] button starts blinking, as does the

LED above the [EDIT SELECT] button which was active the

last time you exited Edit mode. The name of the currently

active parameter page appears in the LCD screen.

Each of the 12 [EDIT SELECT] buttons is dedicated to one

or more Edit functions, as indicated by a name printed in

green below each button.

To exit Edit mode, simply press the [EDIT] button again,

which returns you to the previous Play mode.

EDIT VOICE

SYSTEM

PIANO 1

PERF.B

PERF.A

MASTER TUNE 1

440.0Hz

PAGE

MIDI

POPUP TIME 6

PC=off OTHERS= 3

BALANCE DETUNE

SPLIT TRANSPOSE

MASTER TUNE 1s

440.0Hz

LOCAL 1s

SYSTEM

PIANO 1

MASTER TUNE 1

440.0Hz

POPUP TIME 6

PC=off OTHERS= 3

● ACTIVE

When the Active setting is selected, the P-150’s on-board reverb

effects will function as normal.

● BYPASS

When the Bypass setting is selected, the P-150’s on-board

reverb effects will be disengaged.

DEVICE NUMBER

The Device Number function lets you match the MIDI device

number with the device number of an external instrument.

This is necessary when transmitting and receiving bulk data

and parameter change data.

● OFF

When set to Off, the P-150 will ignore incoming MIDI device

number messages.

● 1 ~ 16

When a specific MIDI device number is selected, the P-150 will

only receive bulk data on the corresponding MIDI device

number.

● ALL

When set to All, the P-150 will receive bulk data on any device

number. (When set to All, the P-150 will transmit on device

number 1.)

MIDI MERGE

The MIDI Merge function lets you merge all data received at

the [MIDI IN] terminal with the data generated by the P-150,

for combined transmission at the [MIDI OUT] terminal.

Instruments which receive merged MIDI data from the P-150

can be controlled by the P-150 as well as other devices

connected to the P-150’s [MIDI IN] terminal.

Note that when performing bulk dump operations, the MIDI

Merge function must be turned off. For details, see page 55.

● OFF

When set to Off (default), only internal MIDI data will be

transmitted from the P-150’s [MIDI OUT] terminal.

● ON

When set to On, any MIDI data received at the [MIDI IN] terminal

will be transmitted as is from the [MIDI OUT] terminal together

with data transmitted by the P-150.

Change the parameter using the [–1/NO] and

[+1/YES] buttons, or by moving the [DATA

ENTRY] slider up or down.

Parameters may consist of numeric values or specific

settings which you can select.

If the P-150 is in Auto Store status, the changes you make

will be stored automatically in the current location. If the P-

150 is in Non Auto Store status, when you change a

parameter and press the [EDIT] button to exit Edit mode, the

STORE? confirmation screen appears.

In this case you will need to store the current

Performance by either overwriting it in its current

location, or copy it in another Performance bank and

number.

Regardless of the Auto Store/Non Auto Store status, the parameter

changes made in the System menus (System, MIDI Filter, PC Table) are

always stored automatically. (For details about store functions, see page

53.)

■ System

System parameters which you can select and edit include

Master Tune, Reverb Bypass, Device Number, MIDI Merge,

Performance Enable, Popup Time, and Store Type.

MASTER TUNE

The Master Tune function lets you fine-tune the basic pitch

of the keyboard.

As an electronic instrument, the P-150 is set to optimum

tuning at the factory, with a default pitch value of 440.0 Hz at

A3. You can, however, fine-tune the P-150’s keyboard

upward or downward within a range of about 100 cents.

● MASTER TUNE (424.0Hz~440.0~456.3Hz)

You can change the master tuning between 424.0Hz and

456.3Hz.

REVERB

The Reverb Bypass function lets you disengage the reverb

effect. You will find the Reverb Bypass useful to disengage

the P-150’s internal DSP when you want to use an external

effector.

EDIT MODE

REVERB 2

active

STORE? (YES/NO)

Voices -›Voices

MASTER TUNE 1s

440.0Hz

DEVICE NUMBER 3

MIDI MERGE 4

off

PERFORMANCE ENABLE

The Performance Enable function lets you switch between

System (“Sys”) settings and Performance (“Perf”) settings for

MIDI channel assignments, local on/off status and controller

assignments. This function lets you apply the System

settings designated in Voice Play mode to all of the

Performances.

● PERFORMANCE MIDI CHANNEL (Perf, Sys)

When Perf is selected, the MIDI transmit and receive channels

designated for the currently selected Performance will be effective. When

Sys (default) is selected, the MIDI transmit and receive channels

designated for the Voice Play mode will affect the entire system.

● PERFORMANCE LOCAL (Perf, Sys)

When Perf is selected, the Local On/Off setting designated for

the currently selected Performance will be effective. When Sys

(default) is selected, the Local On/Off setting designated for the

Voice Play mode will affect the entire system.

● PERFORMANCE CONTROL (Perf, Sys)

When Perf is selected, the controller assignments designated for

the currently selected Performance will be effective. When Sys

(default) is selected, the controller assignments designated for

the Voice Play mode will affect the entire system.

POPUP TIME

The Popup Time function lets you set the number of seconds

a temporary message displays in the screen.

The P-150 has a number of messages which appear in the

screen depending on which feature you access. By setting

the Popup Time, you can determine how long the message

stays in the screen.

You can also set the Program Change message screen to

temporarily display when you change voices or

Performances.

● PC (OFF, 1 ~ 5)

You can either turn the Program Change popup screen off or

have it display between one and five seconds. (The default

setting is Off.)

● OTHERS (1 ~ 5)

You can have all other popup screens display between one and

five seconds. (The default setting is 3.)

STORE TYPE

The Store Type function lets you designate Auto Store or

Non Auto Store status. (For information about storing, see

page 53.)

●

NON AUTO STORE

In Non Auto Store (default) status, only System, MIDI Filter and

PC Table parameters you change will automatically be stored.

Any other changes in Edit mode will cause the STORE?

(YES/NO) screen to display to prompt you for confirmation

before exiting the Edit mode. Any other changes made in Voice

Play mode and Performance Play mode will be ignored unless

you specifically perform the store operation.

● AUTO STORE

In Auto Store status, all settings you change will automatically

be stored.

When Non Auto Store is selected and Edit mode is engaged, the letter S,

P or V will appear to the right of the page number in the upper right hand

corner to indicate which type of parameters you are editing System,

Performance or Voice parameters, respectively.

Channel, Local, CS FC and PS settings are basically classified as

Performance parameters, though they are treated as System parameters

when Sys is selected for MIDI Channel, Local or Controller Assign in the

Performance Enable function (System Menu); see left. When Sys has

been selected, the letter S will appear to the right of the page number,

replacing the letter P.

PERF.MIDI CH 5

sys/ sys/ sys

PERF.CTRL. 5

sys/ sys/ sys

POPUP TIME 6

PC=off OTHERS= 3

PERF.LOCAL 5

sys/ sys/ sys

POPUP TIME 6

PC=off OTHERS= 3

STORE TYPE 7

auto store

EDIT MODE

■ Program Change (PC) Table

The Program Change Table function lets you assign

program change numbers to incoming and outgoing program

change messages.

PROGRAM CHANGE TRANSMIT

The Program Change Transmit function lets you assign

program change transmit numbers to each voice or

Performance. You can also assign bank numbers

(MSB/LSB) as bank select messages.

Your P-150 can transmit a program change message each

time you press a [SELECT] button in Voice or Performance

mode. (You can have the number of the program change

message display briefly when you select a voice or

Performance. For details, see page 45.)

At the factory your P-150 was preset so that each [SELECT]

button will send the program change number corresponding

to the number above the button in Voice mode (1 ~ 12),

followed by subsequent numbers in Performance mode, for

A and B banks (13 ~ 36).

Therefore, when the P-150 is in Voice mode, an external

tone generator connected to the P-150 will receive

messages selecting program 1 when you press the [PIANO

1] button, program 2 when you press the [PIANO 2] button,

and so on. When the P-150 is in Performance mode and

bank A is selected, an external tone generator will receive

messages selecting program 13 when you press [PIANO 1].

Likewise, when bank B is selected, program 25 will be

selected when you press [PIANO 1].

The settings for which program change number is assigned to which

[SELECT] button are grouped in a table known as the program

change transmit table, which you can access to assign a program

change number (between 1 and 128, or Off) to each of the

[SELECT] buttons according to Play mode.

You can also select a bank number combining the MSB (Most

Significant Byte) and LSB (Least Significant Byte). This makes it

possible to select any program on a MIDI device that has more than

128 programs.

● SELECT ASSIGN (V01~V12, A01~A12, B01~B12)

These parameters let you access each [SELECT] button, with

V01 ~ V12 representing the Voice Play mode [VOICE SELECT]

buttons, and A01 ~ A12 representing the Performance Play

mode A bank [PERFORMANCE SELECT] buttons, and B01 ~

B12 representing the Performance Play mode B bank

[PERFORMANCE SELECT] buttons. As you step through each

one, the name will appear in the first line of the screen, and the

current assignments will appear in the second line.

You can choose a specific Voice button number by holding [VOICE] and

pressing the desired [VOICE SELECT] button. You can choose a specific

Performance A bank button number by holding [PERF. A] and pressing

the desired [PERFORMANCE SELECT] button. You can choose a

specific Performance B bank button number by holding [PERF. B] and

pressing the desired [PERFORMANCE SELECT] button.

EDIT MODE

■ MIDI Filter

The MIDI Filter function lets you select the various types of

MIDI data which will be transmitted or received. (Note: The

abbreviation “TX” stands for “Transmit” and the abbreviation

“RX” stands for “Receive”.) Position the cursor over the

Message type or on/off status using the [1] and [q] buttons.

TRANSMIT FILTER

The Transmit Filter settings let you determine which types of

MIDI messages are transmitted from the P-150.

● MESSAGE TYPES

Message types inculude Note On/Off, Control Change, Program

Change, Aftertouch, Pitch Bend, Channel Mode Message,

Parameter Change and Bulk and FA/FB/FC. (Select the

message types with the [-1/NO] and [+1/YES] buttons.)

● ON, OFF

Setting the message type to On status will filter this particular

data, and therefore it will not be transmitted via the [MIDI OUT]

terminal. Setting the message type to Off status will allow the

particular data to be transmitted.

The default setting for Parameter Change is set to On; all others are set

to Off. When controlling external devices such as a tone generator,

Exclusive and Bulk should be set to On. When you record your P-150

Performance to an external sequencer and play it back, Exclusive and

Bulk should be set to Off.

RECEIVE FILTER

The MIDI Receive Filter settings let you determine which

types of incoming MIDI messages are received. When set to

On, the specific data can be protected.

● MESSAGE TYPES

Message types include Note On/Off, Control Change, Program

Change, Pitch Bend, Channel Mode Message, Parameter

Change and Bulk. (Select the message types with [-1/NO] and

[+1/YES] buttons.)

● ON, OFF

Setting the message type to On status will filter this particular

data, and therefore it will not be received at the [MIDI IN]

terminal. Setting the message type to Off status will allow the

particular data to be received.

TX FILTER 1

note on/off=off

Message type

RX FILTER 1

note on/off=off

Message type

PC TX 1

V01=(OFF/OFF) 1

Select assign

● MSB/LSB (Off, 0 ~ 127)

This parameter lets you designate the MSB/LSB bank select

number. When set to Off (default), the P-150 will not transmit the

bank select number.

Pressing the [ 1/NO] button lets you select Off for MSB/LSB and Program

Change Number. When Off is selected for MSB, LSB will also switch off,

and vice-versa.

Bank Select (PC Table)

BANK PROGRAM MSB LSB

Bank 1 1 ~ 128 1 1

Bank 2 1 ~ 128 1 2

Bank 3 1 ~ 128 1 3

Bank 4 1 ~ 128 1 4

““““

● PROGRAM CHANGE NUMBER (Off, 1 ~ 128)

This parameter lets you designate the program change number

for the currently accessed [SELECT] button. When set to Off, no

program change numbers will be transmitted.

PROGRAM CHANGE RECEIVE

The Program Change Receive function lets you assign

program change receive numbers to the internal voices and

Performances, according to the [SELECT] buttons.

The P-150 can receive a program change message from an

external MIDI device, in order to select any of the 12 voices

or 24 Performances.

At the factory your P-150 was preset so that each [SELECT]

button will receive the program change number message

corresponding to the number above the button in Voice

mode (1 ~ 12), followed by subsequent numbers in

Performance mode, for A and B banks (13 ~ 36).

Therefore, when the P-150 is in Voice mode, when an

external controller connected to the P-150 sends a program

change number 1 message, the PIANO 1 voice will be

selected; if it sends a program change number 2 message,

the PIANO 2 voice will be selected, and so on. If it sends a

program change number 13 message, Performance A01 will

be selected; if it sends a program change number 25

message, Performance B01 will be selected, and so on.

Whenever the P-150 receives a program change message, it

will check the program change receive table to determine

whether a voice or Performance has been assigned to the

Received program change number. If so, the main voice will

automatically switch to the voice indicated by the program

change receive table. (If the P-150 is in Dual mode, this will

cause it to shift to Single mode.) If the program change

function has been turned off for that number the message

will simply be ignored.

●

PROGRAM CHANGE NUMBER (1~128)

This parameter lets you designate a program change receive

number. As you step through each one, the SELECT

assignment will appear to the right.

● SELECT ASSIGN

(V01~V12, A01~A12, B01~B12, Off)

This parameter lets you assign which [SELECT] button to assign

to the currently designated Program Change Number.

You can choose a specific Voice button number by holding [VOICE] and

pressing the desired [VOICE SELECT] button. You can choose a specific

Performance A bank button number by holding [PERF. A] and pressing

the desired [PERFORMANCE SELECT] button. You can choose a

specific Performance B bank button number by holding [PERF. B] and

pressing the desired [PERFORMANCE SELECT] button.

Pressing the [ 1/NO] button lets you select Off for Program Change

Number and Select Assign.

■ Channel

The Channel function lets you assign the P-150’s MIDI

transmit and receive channel numbers or status.

When connecting the P-150 to an external MIDI device, such

as a multitimbral tone generator or synthesizer, you will need

to set the P-150’s transmit channel to the same number as

the external device’s receive channel, in order to play the

external instrument with the P-150’s keyboard. Likewise, you

will need to set the P-150’s receive channel to the same

number as an external keyboard’s transmit channel in order

to play the P-150’s internal voices from an external

keyboard. (For more information, see Using MIDI, page 57.)

PC RX 2

1=V01

Program Change number

CHANNEL TRNS 1

TX= 1 RX= 1

PC TX BankMSB 1

V01=( 1/ 1) 1

LSB numberMSB number

PC TX 2

V01=( 1/ 1) 1

Program Change number

PC RX 2

1=V01

Select Assign

EDIT MODE

● TRANSMIT CHANNEL (Off, 1 ~ 16)

The P-150 can be set to transmit MIDI messages on any one of

16 MIDI channels. When set to Off the P-150 will not transmit

MIDI messages.

● RECEIVE CHANNEL (Off, 1 ~ 16, All)

The P-150 can be set to receive MIDI messages on any one of

16 MIDI channels. When set to Off, all incoming MIDI messages

will be ignored. When set to All, MIDI messages can be received

on all 16 channels at once. In Dual and Single modes, all

channel messages will be transmitted via the channel specified

here. In Split mode, the main voice will be transmitted via the

channel specified here and the sub voice will be transmitted via

the next highest channel number than the main voice.

When you set the transmit channel to Off, the MIDI transmit button will be

disabled for the currently selected Performance.

If you select Sys for MIDI CHANNEL in the Performance Enable function

(System menu), the MIDI transmit/receive channel you have previously

set for the currently selected Performance may actually be different, since

the current setting (System setting) in the Voice Play mode will be active.

You can change the System setting, and you can easily find which setting

(Sys or Perf) is selected in the Performance Enable function, as the letter

P will display to the left of the page number if Perf is selected.

■ Local

The Local control function lets you disconnect the P-150’s

keyboard from its internal tone generator.

It is usually turned on so the internal voices will sound when

you play the keyboard. When turned off, the internal tone

generator will not respond to the notes you play, but the

keyboard will still transmit messages via the [MIDI OUT]

terminal, and the internal tone generator will respond to

messages received at the [MIDI IN] terminal if the transmit

channels or receive channels are appropriately set. This is

essential when using the P-150 as a master keyboard

controller in an expanded MIDI system.

● LOCAL (On, Off)

When set to On, the internal tone generator will respond to notes

you play on the P-150’s keyboard. When set to Off, the internal

tone generator will not respond to notes you play on the P-150’s

keyboard.

If you select Sys for LOCAL in the Performance Enable function (System

menu), the Local On/Off setting you have designated previously for the

currently selected Performance may actually be different, since the

current setting (System setting) in the Voice Play mode will be active. You

can change the System setting, and you can easily find which setting

(Sys or Perf) is selected in the Performance Enable function, as the letter

P will display to the left of the page number if Perf is selected.

■ Continuous Slider (CS) /

Foot Controller (FC)

This function lets you assign a function and range to the [CS]

and [FC] assignable continuous controllers, for realtime

control during performance of the P-150 and/or an external

MIDI device.

Once you assign a function to the [CS], the function will be

controlled by the [CS] slider on the panel. Once you assign a

function to the [FC], the function will be controlled by the

Foot Controller, if it is properly connected to the [FOOT

CONTROLLER] jack on the rear panel. The Yamaha FC-7

Foot Controller (continuous type) and FC4/FC5 Footswitch

(on/off; discrete type) are optionally available.

For example, you can have the [CS] (or [FC]) control the

total volume, main or sub voice volume, or control the reverb

depth or modulation speed, or transmit aftertouch messages

to tone generators capable of receiving them, or send a

particular type of control change message to external MIDI

devices. The types of functions which can be assigned, and

a brief explanation of each, are shown in the following chart.

LOCAL 1

CHANNEL TRNS %1p

TX= 1 RX= 1

CS ASSIGN 1

main volume:007

INTERNAL CONTROL

Off No function assigned

Reverb Depth Controls the reverb depth level

Mod. Speed Controls the modulation speed level

Total Volume Controls the P-150’s overall volume

Main Volume Controls the main voice volume

Sub Volume Controls the sub voice volume

MIDI CONTROL CHANGE MESSAGES

Modulation 001 Sends a modulation message

Breath Control 002 Sends a breath control message

Foot Control 004 Sends a foot control message

Porta. Time 005 Sends a portamento time message

Data Entry 006 Sends a data entry message

Volume 007 Sends a volume message

Balance Control 008 Sends a balance control message

Panpot 010 Sends a stereo panning message

Expression 011

Sends a volume expression message

Sustain 064 Sends a sustain message

Portamento Sw 065

Sends a portamento switch message

Sostenuto 066 Sends a sostenuto message

Soft Pedal 067 Sends a soft pedal message

Legato Foot 068 Sends a legato foot message

Hold 2 069 Sends a hold 2 message (such as

“freezing” the operation of a

synthesizer’s envelope until the

Footswitch is released)

Harm. Content 071

Sends a harmonic content message

Release Time 072 Sends a release time message

Attack Time 073 Sends an attack time message

Brightness 074 Sends a brightness message

Eff. 1 Depth 091 Sends an effect 1 depth message

Eff. 2 Depth 092 Sends an effect 2 depth message

Eff. 3 Depth 093 Sends an effect 3 depth message

Eff. 4 Depth 094 Sends an effect 4 depth message

Eff. 5 Depth 095 Sends an effect 5 depth message

Inc. Sw 096

Sends an increment switch message

Dec. Sw 097

Sends a decrement switch message

NRPN LSB 098 Sends a Non Registered

Parameter number LSB bank

select message

NRPN MSB 099 Sends a Non Registered

Parameter number MSB bank

select message

RPN LSB 100 Sends a Registered Parameter

Number LSB bank select message

RPN MSB 101 Sends a Registered Parameter

Number MSB bank select

message

Aftertouch Sends a channel aftertouch message

● CONTINUOUS SLIDER ASSIGN (see chart)

For assigning a specific function to the CS. (Default is main

volume.)

● CONTINUOUS SLIDER RANGE MINIMUM (1~128)

/ MAXIMUM (1~128)

The values set here determine the minimum and maximum

volume range when you move the [CS] slider. (You cannot set

the minimum number to exceed the maximum number.)

● FOOT CONTROLLER ASSIGN (see chart)

For assigning a specific function to the foot controller (FC).

(Default is sub volume.)

● FOOT CONTROLLER RANGE MINIMUM

(1~128) / MAXIMUM (1~128)

The values set here determine the minimum and maximum

volume range when you press the [FC] controller. (You cannot

set the minimum number to exceed the maximum number.)

If you select Sys for CONTROL in the Performance Enable function

(System menu), the controller assignment you have previously set for the

currently selected Performance may actually be different, since the

current setting (System setting) in the Voice Play mode will be active. You

can change the System setting, and you can easily find which setting

(Sys or Perf) is selected in the Performance Enable function, as the letter

P will display to the left of the page number if Perf is selected.

The actual range (1 ~ 128) may actually be different depending on the

selected function type. If the maximum range of the selected function is

less than 128, the available range will be recognized and divided equally

into 128 units, and the setting for Min/Max will be executed.

CS RANGE MIN 2

1#128

FC ASSIGN 3

total volume

FC RANGE MIN 4

1#128

CS ASSIGN 1

main volume:007

EDIT MODE

■ Panel Switch (PS)

The Panel Switch function lets you assign a function to each

of the two Panel Switches for realtime control of an external

MIDI sequencer.

This gives you the flexibility to send Start, Stop or Continue

commands to external devices like sequencers and rhythm

programmers from the P-150’s panel, i.e., you can start and

stop the external device simply by pressing the [PS]

switches.

● PS1 ASSIGN (Off, Start, Continue, Stop)

When set to Off, the [PS1] will have no specific Play function. When set to

Start, Continue or Stop, you can control an external MIDI device by

pressing [PS1]. (The default setting for [PS1] is Start.)

● PS2 ASSIGN

Same as for PS1 ASSIGN, above. (The default setting for [PS2] is Stop.)

If you select Sys for CONTROL in the Performance Enable function

(System menu), the Panel Switch assignment you have previously set for

the currently selected Performance may actually be different, since the

current setting (System setting) in the Voice Play mode will be active. You

can change the System setting, and you can easily find which setting

(Sys or Perf) is selected in the Performance Enable function, as the letter

P will display to the left of the page number if Perf is selected.

■ Name

The Name function lets you input a name (up to 16

characters in length) for your Performances.

● PERFORMANCE NAME

The available characters include upper and lower case Roman letters,

numbers 0 ~ 9, a space and various symbols. Position the cursor with the

[1]/[q] buttons and choose the desired character with the [ 1/NO]/[+1/YES]

buttons or the [DATA ENTRY] slider.

, ! , " , # , $ , % , & , ' , ( , ) ,

* , + , , , - , . , / , 0 ~ 9 ,

: , ; , < , = , > , ? , @ , A ~ Z ,

[ , , ] , ^ , _, ` , a ~ z

{ , | , } , › , ‹

(Space)

EDIT MODE

■ Organ Combination

The Organ Combination function lets you freely edit the

Organ 1 voice. This feature gives you considerable control

over the timbre and characteristics of the organ sound, so

that the range of possibilities are practically limitless.

With this feature you can literally recreate all of the classic

organ sounds, from theatre organ to rock and jazz organ, by

adjusting the flute footage levels and the attack settings, just

like on conventional organs.

To edit the organ sound, you must first select the Organ1

voice before entering Edit mode. Otherwise the CANNOT

EDIT message will display when you select the Organ 1

Combination function in Edit mode. (If this happens, simply

exit Edit mode, select the Organ 1 voice, and then reenter

Edit mode.)

● FOOTAGE (16’, 8’, 5-1/3’, 4’, 2-2/3’, 2’, 1-1/3’, 1’)

There are eight flute footages. The larger footages generate the

bass characteristics of the sound, the smaller footages generate

the treble characteristics of the sound, and those footages in

between generate the mid-range characteristics of the sound.

You can adjust the volume level of each flute footage between 0

(no volume) and 7 (maximum volume).

When only the lowest or highest footage is activated, some notes which

exceeds the legal range will not produce any sound.

● RESPONSE, ATTACK (4’, 2-2/3’, 2’, Length, Mode)

The left-most parameter, RSP (Response) determines how fast

the overall organ combination (footages in page 1) volume

reaches maximum level, between a range of 0 (fastest) and 7

(slowest). There are three Attack footages which determine the

character of the percussive portion of the organ voice. You can

adjust the volume level of each Attack footage between 0 (no

volume) and 7 (maximum volume).

PS1 ASSIGN 1

start:FA

PERF.NAME 1

PERFORMANCE<***>

COMBI. 16'=7 1

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

16' 8' 5-1/3' 4' 2-2/3' 2' 1-1/3' 1'

COMBI. RESP.=7 2

RSP ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ E

Response

PS2 ASSIGN 2

stop:FC

COMBI. LENG.=3 2

ATK ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ E

Attack Length

COMBI. 4'=7 2

ATK ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ E

4' 2-2/3' 2'

Attack Footages

The right-most parameter, Attack mode, determines which notes

in a held cluster of notes are given an attack sound. With the

(first) setting, only the first note played will have an attack; all

other notes played while the first note is held will have no attack.

With the [E] (Each) setting, all notes played will have an attack sound.

■ Pitch Bend (PB)/Modulation

Wheel (MW)

This function lets you set the maximum range that the pitch

will bend when you use the [PITCH] wheel, as well as

determine the type of effect assigned to the [MODULATION]

wheel.

● PITCH BEND RANGE (0 ~ 12)

You can set the pitch to bend up or down for each voice within one

octave, where 0 represents no pitch bend, and 12 represents one octave.

(The default for each voice is set to 2.) Each unit is one semitone.

Moving the [PITCH] wheel to its extreme position while playing the lowest

or highest note on the keyboard may exceed the P-150’s legal range (A-1

~ C7). In such a case, the P-150 will play and repeat the one octave

higher or lower range. (This also occurs if the Transpose setting causes

the pitch bend to exceed the legal range.)

● MODULATION WHEEL ASSIGN (Off, Reverb

Depth, Modulation Speed, Vibrato)

You can assign one of three effects for each voice to the

[MODULATION] wheel, or turn the effect off.

The vibrato effect is internally set and cannot be modified. Note that trying

to apply the vibrato effect to the Piano 1 ~ 4 voices will have no effect.

■ Keyboard Sensitivity

The Keyboard Sensitivity function lets you control how the

volume of the internal voices and connected MIDI

instruments respond to your playing.

The P-150 lets you designate independent Keyboard

Sensitivity settings for the internal tone generator (each

voice) and external MIDI devices, as well as the minimum

and maximum range of the keyboard volume.

● KEYBOARD SENSITIVITY INTERNAL (Normal,

Soft-1~3, Hard-1~3, Fixed-1~3)

This setting determines how the P-150’s keyboard affects the

internal voices. There are ten different types of sensitivity

settings. (For details, see Velocity Curves, below.)

● KEYBOARD SENSITIVITY MIDI (Normal, Soft-1~3,

Hard-1~3, Fixed-1~3)

This setting determines how the P-150’s keyboard affects

external MIDI devices, such as a tone generator. There are ten

different types of sensitivity settings. (For details, see Velocity

Curves, next page.)

● KEYBOARD RANGE (Minimum, Maximum)

The values set here determine the minimum and maximum

volume range of the keyboard, between 1 and 128. (You cannot

set the minimum number to exceed the maximum number.)

When both minimum and maximum are set to 1, no sound will be

produced.

MW ASSIGN 2

vibrato

PB RANGE 1

KBD SENS.INT. 1

normal/

KBD SENS.MIDI 2

normal/

KBD RANGE MIN 3

1-128

EDIT MODE

COMBI. FIRST 3

ATK ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ E

Attack Mode

Velocity Curves

The P-150 has 10 different types of sensitivity settings for

both internal voices and external MIDI instruments,

organized in four categories: Normal, Soft-1~3, Hard-1~3,

and Fixed-1~3.

These give you wide and flexible control over how the

strength of your playing affects the volume of the internal

voices and external MIDI instruments.

❏ NORMAL

The P-150’s Normal setting represents the standard linear “velocity-

to-volume” relationship.

On a conventional acoustic instrument such as an acoustic piano,

the harder you play, the louder the resulting sound. Generally, this

velocity-to-volume relationship is linear, i.e., the sound becomes

louder in direct proportion to the strength with which you play, as

shown in the following graph.

❏ Soft-1, Soft-2, Soft-3

The Soft curves are designed to increase the level of the

sound with a softer playing style.

❏ Hard-1, Hard-2, Hard-3

The Hard curves are designed to increase the level of the

sound with a stronger playing style.

❏ Fixed-1, Fixed-2, Fixed-3

The Fixed curves create flat velocity response. The volume

of the sound remains the same, no matter how softly or

strongly the keys are played.

■ Internal Equalizer

The Internal Equalizer function lets you adjust the volume of

the low, middle and high EQ ranges for the currently

selected internal voice.

● EQ (Low, Mid, High)

You can boost (increase) or cut (decrease) the volume of each

range independently, with -16 representing maximum volume

cut, 16 representing maximum volume boost, and 0 representing

normal volume. (The default for each voice is 0.)

■ Reverb

When the P-150 is in Edit mode, pressing [REVERB]

accesses the Reverb Type and Depth settings for the

currently selected voice.

● REVERB TYPE (Room, Stage, Hall, Off)

You can select one of the three reverb types for the currently

selected voice or turn the reverb off.

● DEPTH (0 ~ 7)

You can set the reverb depth value between 0 (no effect) and 7

(maximum effect).

You can also access the Reverb Type and Depth parameters in Voice

Play mode (see page 22).

■ Modulation

When the P-150 is in Edit mode, pressing [MODULATION]

accesses the Modulation Type and Speed settings for the

currently selected voice.

● MODULATION TYPE (Chorus, Symphonic,

Tremolo, Off)

You can select one of the three modulation types for the

currently selected voice or turn the modulation off.

● SPEED (0 ~ 7)

You can set the modulation speed value between 0 (no effect)

and 7 (maximum effect).

You can also access the Modulation Type and Speed parameters in

Voice Play mode (see page 23).

EDIT MODE

EQ LOW= 0 1

REVERB TYPE 1

T=room D=4

Reverb type Depth

MOD. TYPE 1

T=tremolo S=2

Modulation type Speed

Volume

Max.

Min.

Soft Hard

Velocity

(playing strength)

KBD SENS.INT %

soft-2e

KBD SENS.INT 1

hard-1h

KBD SENS.INT 1

fixed-1i

STORE

OVERWRITING IN PLAY MODE

In Voice Play mode, press the [STORE]

button. The LED above the [STORE] button starts

blinking. The following screen appears.

Press [+1/YES] if you want to overwrite the

current Voice and Performance parameter

settings. (Press [–1/NO] if you want to

cancel the store operation and return to the

previous mode.) The STORE

COMPLETED screen briefly appears to confirm the

store operation.

STORING A PERFORMANCE

In either Voice Play mode or Performance

Play mode, press the [STORE] button.

The LED above the [STORE] button starts blinking.

The following screen appears.

STORE

-1/NO +1/YES

PS1 PS2

STORE? (YES/NO)

Voices -› Voices

** STORE **

** COMPLETED **

STORE? (YES/NO)

A01 -› A01

When Auto Store is designated all parameter changes are

stored automatically as you make them. Thus, you can jump

back and forth between voices and Voice and Performance

modes freely as you play, since all settings will remain as

you set them. In this case, necessary storing is literally a

matter of copying one Performance to a specific

Performance bank and number.

When Non Auto Store is designated, in general the changes

you make to voices such as reverb and modulation settings

will be lost as soon as you change voices, Performances or

modes. After making changes in Edit mode, however, the P-

150 will prompt you and give you the opportunity to overwrite

the current edit when you try to leave Edit mode.

You will find it most convenient to set up your Performances

in Voice Play mode, Auto Store status, since voice selection

is so simple, then copy it to one of the 24 Performance

memories for instant recall when you need it.

By switching into Non Auto Store status, you can be sure

that your Performances are protected, and any changes you

make in one will not be applied unless you specifically store

it.

For details about changing the Store status, see page 11.

Note that there is a fine distinction between Voice Play mode

store and Performance Play mode store functions. In Voice

Play mode, you can overwrite the current set of Voice and

Performance parameter settings. In Performance Play mode,

you can select a specific destination Performance in which to

make a duplicate, or copy the current Performance

parameter settings. Therefore, if you select a destination

Performance in which to store the current Voice Play mode

Performance parameter settings, you are storing it in the

Performance Play mode.

Regardless of the Auto Store/Non Auto Store status, the parameter

changes made in the System, MIDI Filter and PC Table functions are

always stored automatically.

STORE

To overwrite the current Performance:

Press [+1/YES]. (Press [–1/NO] if you want to

cancel the store operation and return to the

previous mode.) This effectively stores the

changes you have made in Edit mode (except for

changes made in the overall System settings in the

System, MIDI Filter and PC Table functions, which are

stored automatically) in the current Performance

location, and thus will be retained the next time you

enter Performance Play mode.

To copy the current Performance into

another Performance location: First press

[PERF. A] or [PERF. B] to designate the

destination Performance bank, then press

the desired [PERFORMANCE SELECT]

button to designate the Performance

number. (You can also designate the

destination Performance bank and number

by moving the [DATA ENTRY] slider.)

The name of the Performance bank and number

appears in the screen.

Press [+1/YES] to store the current

Performance into the designated

Performance bank and number. (Press

[–1/NO] if you want to cancel the store

operation and return to the previous mode.)

The STORE COMPLETED screen briefly appears to

confirm the store operation.

SYSTEM MIDI FILTER PC TABLE CHANNEL LOCAL CS FC PS NAME ORGAN

COMBINATION

PB MW KBD SENS. INT.EQ

PIANO 1

123456789101112

PIANO 2 PIANO 3 PIANO 4 E.PIANO 1 E.PIANO 2 E.PIANO 3 VIBES ORGAN1 ORGAN2 STRINGS BASS

PERF.A

PERF.B

PERF.A

STORE? (YES/NO)

A01 -› B10

APPENDIX

■ Bulk Dump

The Bulk Dump feature lets you offload parameter settings

by sending it to an external MIDI data storage device (such

as the Yamaha MDF2 MIDI Data Filer), as well as load it

back into the P-150 by receiving it from an external storage

device.

This gives you the luxury of being able to build a library of P-

150 settings by storing them on floppy disks.

The P-150 can send and receive four types of data in bulk:

All data (the P-150’s entire settings); Voice data (Voice

settings only); Performance Bank A data (Performance

settings for the A bank only); and Performance Bank B data

(Performance settings for the B bank only).

Send Bulk Data

A send bulk data operation must be initiated from the P-150.

First, however, make sure the P-150’s MIDI Merge function

is off (see page 44).

Next, match the device number of the P-150 (see page 44)

with the external storage device by assigning the same

device number to each. Then, set the external device so that

it is standing by waiting for a bulk dump receive message.

(For details about how to set the device number and bulk

receive standby for the external device, consult the external

device’s owner’s manual.)

SENDING BULK DATA

Voice Data: Hold the [MIDI] button and

press the [VOICE] button.

Performance Bank A Data: Hold the [MIDI]

button and press the [PERF. A] button.

Performance Bank B Data: Hold the [MIDI]

button and press the [PERF. B] button.

All Data: Hold the [MIDI] button and press

the [PIANO 1 SELECT] button.

The BULK SEND screen appears while the operation

is in progress.

When the operation is finished, the BULK SEND

COMPLETED screen briefly appears.

To cancel the operation while it is still in progress,

press the [–1/NO] button. The BULK SEND EXIT

screen briefly appears.

The send bulk data operation cannot be executed when the MIDI

Transmit Filter (bulk) is set to On, or the device number is set to Off.

Bulk Data Receive

Bulk data receive operations must be initiated from the

external device. First, however, make sure the P-150’s MIDI

Receive Filter (bulk) function is off (see page 46). Next,

make sure the device numbers of both devices are set to the

same number (see page 44).

Once you have made these preliminary preparations, exit the

Edit mode and return to the Voice Play or Performance Play

mode. Now you’re ready to send data to the P-150 using the

external device’s send bulk data operation. The P-150 will

automatically accept the data. (For details about setting the

device number of the external device and initiating a send

bulk data operation, see the external device’s owner’s

manual.)

MIDI

VOICE

SYSTEM

PIANO 1

PERF.B

PERF.A

MIDI

VOICE

SYSTEM

PIANO 1

PERF.B

PERF.A

MIDI

VOICE

SYSTEM

PIANO 1

PERF.B

PERF.A

BULK SEND

Voices

** BULK SEND **

** COMPLETED **

** BULK SEND **

** EXIT **

MIDI

VOICE

SYSTEM

PIANO 1

PERF.B

PERF.A

APPENDIX

■ Initialize

The Initialize feature lets you restore the initial factory default

settings with a quick and simple operation.

Before initializing the settings, make sure to first offload any

data that you want to save using the Bulk Dump operation.

Otherwise, the Voice and Performance data you have

created will be lost permanently.

INITIALIZING THE DEFAULT SETTINGS

Press the [POWER] switch to turn off the

power.

To initialize all the default settings, hold

both the [MIDI] and [EDIT] buttons, then

press the [POWER] switch to turn on the

power.

The INITIALIZE ALL screen briefly appears.

PERFORMANCE A (or B) BANK: You can also

initialize only the Performance A bank (or B bank)

default settings. To do so, first turn the power off, then

hold both the [MIDI] and [PERF. A] (or [PERF. B])

buttons and turn the power back on.

VOICE SETTINGS: Similarly, you can initialize only

the Voice parameter default settings. To do so, first

turn the power off, then hold both the [MIDI] and

[VOICE] buttons and turn the power back on.

Factory Default Settings

The default settings are shown in Factory Default Settings

lists on pages 64, 65 and 66.

** INITIALIZE **

** All **

** INITIALIZE **

** Perf.A **

** INITIALIZE **

** Voices **

ON/ OFF

POWER

MIDI EDIT

ON/ OFF

POWER

MIDI VOICE

ON/ OFF

POWER

MIDI

PERF A

APPENDIX

System messages also come in a number of varieties.

SYSTEM REALTIME messages are used to start, stop and

synchronize the sequencing devices in a MIDI system.

SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE messages allows for the transmission

of data specific to individual devices. This data can be either

individual parameter settings, which are transmitted as

PARAMETER CHANGE messages, or large blocks of

settings, which are usually referred to as BULK DUMPS.

When using the P-150’s MIDI functions, you will be mainly

concerned with channel voice messages and system

exclusive messages. For detailed information about other

types of messages the P-150 supports, and how their

corresponding functions are implemented, refer to the MIDI

Data Format and MIDI Implementation Chart sections.

■ Using MIDI

MIDI is an acronym that stands for Musical Instrument Digital

Interface, an international standard in use since the 1980s

for the purpose of allowing electronic musical instruments—

such as synthesizers, tone generators, rhythm programmers,

digital keyboards like the P150, and others—to

“communicate” with each other by sending and receiving

compatible note, controller and other MIDI data.

With MIDI, instruments made by different manufacturers can

easily be connected to each other using special MIDI cables,

and configured to work together in a variety of ways that

greatly expands your music composing, performing and even

learning capabilities.

Following is an outline of the basic concepts about MIDI

you’ll need to know to get up and running in short order. Also

included are a few examples of MIDI system connections.

MIDI Channels

The MIDI standard provides 16 different channels for the

transmission of data between musical instruments. A MIDI

KEYBOARD is capable of transmitting data on at least one

of these channels. Sequencers and MIDI-equipped

computers with music sequencing software (both of which

are generally capable of recording, editing and playing back

MIDI note, controller and other data) usually transmit data on

several channels at once, each channel being designated for

a different part of an ensemble performance. For example, a

Piano part might be assigned to channel 1, a bass part to

channel 2, a horn part to channel 3, and so on.

MIDI devices known as TONE GENERATORS, which are

literally synthesizers without a keyboard, can receive MIDI

data from keyboards, sequencers, or computers and

produce sounds in response. MULTITIMBRAL tone

generators can play more than one voice at a time, since

they can receive data on more than one channel at a time.

MIDI Messages

Data which is transmitted between MIDI devices takes the

form of MIDI messages. There are various types of

messages. Messages most closely associated with the

actual performance of music are called CHANNEL VOICE

messages; these include NOTE ON and NOTE OFF

messages, which tell a tone generator which notes to play,

and when to start and stop playing them. CONTROL

CHANGE, PITCH BEND, and AFTERTOUCH or key

pressure messages indicate how a keyboard’s control

functions are being operated. PROGRAM CHANGE

messages tell a tone generator to switch to another voice.

Channel voice messages are transmitted on a specific

channel which will be received by the tone generator for

which they are intended. They are different from SYSTEM

messages, which are transmitted on all channels and

received by all of the devices in a MIDI system.

Channel

Messages

System

Messages

VOICE

MODE

Note On/Off, Control Change,

Program Change, Pitch Bend,

Channel Pressure*

All Note Off

REALTIME

Start*/Stop*/Continue*,

Active Sensing

End of Exclusive (F7)COMMON

EXCLUSIVE System Exclusive (F0)

*Transmit only.

APPENDIX

MIDI Terminals

MIDI devices transmit messages to each other via special

MIDI cables, which are connected to special MIDI terminals

on each device. There are three types of MIDI terminals: IN,

OUT, and THRU.

Not all MIDI devices have three MIDI terminals, but most,

including the P-150, do. A device with all three terminals will

receive incoming data via its MIDI IN terminal, and output its

own data via the MIDI OUT terminal. The MIDI THRU

terminal merely echoes, or passes, the data received at the

MIDI IN terminal unaffected. This allows a device to be

connected in the middle of a series (or “daisy chain”) of

instruments, so that the third instrument in the chain will

receive the data transmitted by the first instrument rather

than that transmitted by the second.

Some MIDI instruments, such as the P-150, have a MIDI

merge feature which essentially combines the functions of

the MIDI OUT and MIDI THRU terminals. For example, when

the P-150’s MIDI merge function is turned on, the MIDI OUT

terminal will output a combination of the P-150’s own data

plus the messages it receives via its MIDI IN terminal. An

instrument receiving this merged data will be controlled by

both the P-150 and the device connected to the P-150’s

MIDI IN terminal.

MIDI System Connections

One of the simplest MIDI setups is to connect the P-150 to

one or more tone generators (such as the Yamaha MU80),

as shown in the following example.

In this case, you can select the voices of both external tone

generators directly from the P-150’s panel. In Single or Dual

mode, the notes you play on the P-150’s keyboard will play

designated voices in the external tone generators, so long as

their MIDI receive channels are assigned to the same

number as the P-150’s MIDI transmit channel number. In

Split mode, the P-150 can transmit on two MIDI channels at

the same time (one for the main and one for the sub voice),

so you can set one tone generator to respond to only the

main voice notes and the other tone generator to respond

only to the sub voice notes. You can also take advantage of

the P-150’s ability to have independent transpose and

keyboard sensitivity settings for its internal tone generator

and MIDI transmit note messages.

P-150 MIDI Controllers

The P-150’s MIDI controllers include the two [PS] buttons,

the [CS] slider, [PITCH] and [MODULATION] wheels and

[FC] Footswitch. You can set the controllers to transmit

specific control messages, and assign the external tone

generators to respond accordingly. The [PITCH] wheel is

dedicated to pitch bend and cannot be assigned otherwise.

Connecting a Sequencer

Another simple MIDI setup is to connect the P-150 to a

sequencer, as shown in the following example.

In this case, the sequencer is used to record the note,

program change, controller, etc. data as you play the P-150,

and then play it back using the P-150’s internal voices. You

can start and stop the sequencer using the P-150’s [PS]

buttons (see page 50). Some sequencers have extensive

note and other data editing features. The setup shown above

will also work for bulk data storage operations (see page 55).

Use a sequencer or a special MIDI data storage device

(such as the Yamaha MDF2 MIDI Data Filer) to save data

from and restore data to the P-150.

MIDI OUT

MIDI IN

P150

MU80(A)

MIDI THRU

MU80(B)

(For recording)

MIDI IN

MIDI OUT

MIDI IN MIDI OUT

(For playback)

Sequencer (QY300)

P150

APPENDIX

Besides eliminating the possibility of MIDI delays, a MIDI

patch bay is essential in a larger setup where you frequently

need to perform bulk dump and other operations with

specific devices, and don’t want to waste time plugging and

unplugging cables accordingly. A MIDI patch bay lets you

instantly reconfigure the way all MIDI cables are connected

for a given application.

MIDI

THRU 2

MIDI

IN 2

MIDI

OUT

MIDI

OUT

MIDI

THRU 3

MIDI

THRU 4

MIDI

THRU 5

MIDI

THRU 6

MIDI

IN 1

MIDI

THRU 1

P150

SPX-990

MU80(A)

MU80(C)

MU80(B)

QY300

MJC 8 MIDI Patch Bay

A more sophisticated MIDI setup is required if you want to

connect a sequencer, several tone generators and perhaps

an effects device. The series, or “daisy chaining” method is

shown in the following illustration.

In this case, the sequencer is used to record the note,

program change, controller, etc. data as you play the P-150,

and then play it back using the voices in the external tone

generators, as well as the P-150’s internal voices.

Multitimbral tone generators (such as the Yamaha MU80)

can play more than one voice at a time, so you can configure

them for layering several voices by assigning the same MIDI

channel to more than one voice, or build up a complex

ensemble by assigning a different MIDI channel to each

voice that makes up a part in your composition.

You can send program change messages directly to the

external tone generators and the effects device (such as the

SPX-990) from the P-150, or record these messages in the

sequencer at specific locations in the song, so that voices

and effects will change “on cue” during sequencer

playback—thus giving you enormous music production

power. Note that since you would be recording each music

part using a different voice, you would need to set the P-

150’s keyboard Local feature to Off status (see page 48).

Be aware that the longer your daisy chain becomes (and

also depending on how long your MIDI cables are), the

higher the chances that a noticeable “MIDI delay” will occur

during play, caused by the time it takes for the MIDI data to

reach each device. To avoid such a potentially annoying

problem, you can use a MIDI patch bay (such as the

Yamaha MJC 8), which is equipped with multiple MIDI IN

and MIDI THRU terminals, as shown in the following

illustration.

MIDI IN

MIDI

MIDI IN

MIDI OUT

MIDI

THRU

MIDI THRU

P150

QY300

MU80(A) MU80(B)

SPX-990

■ Error Messages

Occasionally you may encounter certain error messages which appear in the LCD screen. Below is a list with descriptions of

each.

The internal backup battery charge is low and the battery should be replaced. (See page 2.)

Too much MIDI data is being received at once. Reception of data is interrupted and cannot be

continued. Reduce the amount of data and attempt the operation again.

An error occurred during reception of MIDI data. Check all MIDI connections, settings, etc., and

attempt the operation again.

An error occurred during reception of bulk data. Check all MIDI connections, settings, etc., and

attempt the operation again.

Certain data cannot be transmitted or received because a MIDI Filter is set to On. Check each

MIDI Filter setting in Edit mode. (See page 46.)

Bulk data cannot be transmitted or received because the Device Number parameter is either

turned off or does not match that of the connected device. (See page 55.)

The Send Bulk Data operation cannot be executed when MIDI Merge is on. (See page 44.)

APPENDIX

*** ERROR1 ***

REPLACE BATTERY

*** ERROR2 ***

MIDI RX OVERFLOW

*** ERROR4 ***

MIDI BULK ERROR

*** ERROR5 ***

MIDI FILTER ON !

*** ERROR6 ***

DEVICE NO. ERROR

*** ERROR7 ***

MERGE SW ON !

*** ERROR3 ***

MIDI DATA ERROR

APPENDIX

■ Troubleshooting

The P-150 is a rather sophisticated electronic instrument with many parameter settings which affect its operation status. As

such, occasionally you may find that it does not function as you think it should.

If this happens, before rushing the P-150 to the service center, carefully and methodically try to isolate the problem. Most of the

time you’ll find the problem to be of an extremely simple nature.

• The first thing you should do is check whether the problem is in the P-150 itself, or in one of the connected devices, or in any

of the audio or MIDI cables.

• Also try changing the voices or Performances on the P-150 and check if the problem persists. If the problem occurs with only

one specific voice or Performance, check each of its parameters to see if you can isolate the specific cause. If the problem

occurs regardless of which voice or Performance is selected, check the System parameters to see if a particular global

setting is the cause.

Possible Cause and Solution

No sound is output Check that:

from the P-150 • The [SPEAKER] switch on the rear panel is turned on.

• The [VOLUME] slider is turned up.

• The Foot Controller that is assigned to Volume or Expression (011) is

pressed down.

• The Local On/Off feature is set to On. (See page 48.)

• (If the Local On/Off feature is set to Off and you’re using the P-150 with a sequencer), the

Transmit Channel is set to the same number as the Receive Channel. (See page 48.)

Little or no sound is output Check that the Keyboard Sensitivity setting is appropriate. (See page 51.)

Depending on which keys of the Check that in Split mode, the Balance setting is appropriate. (See page 30.)

keyboard are played, no sound

(or only a very soft sound) is

output

The pitch of the P-150 is off Check that:

or out of tune (compared • The Master Tune parameter is set correctly. (See page 44.)

to standard pitch or other • The Transpose feature is turned off. (See page 33.)

instruments) • The Detune (Dual mode) is set to 0. (See page 27.)

The pitch of the P-150 Check that the modulation settings are turned off, and the [MODULATION] wheel position is

not pure set to minimum.

The sound is too thin, or too

Check the Internal EQ as well as the Panel Equalizer settings. Adjust one or the other to flat,

“boomy”, or radically different or normal settings. (See pages 24, 52.) Also check the [MODULATION] wheel position, or

in timbre than expected the effect settings, as these can drastically alter the sound. (See pages 22, 23, 51.)

Some notes of a chord or

You may have played more notes than the maximum polyphony of the P-150. Remember that

sustained passage polyphony is decreased when Dual or Split mode is active, or a stereo Piano is selected.

(See (held with the Footswitch) page 21.) The situation may also occur when playing the P-150’s keyboard at the same

time cannot be heard a sequencer is playing internal voices.

The reverb or modulation effect Check that:

cannot be heard • The Reverb is set to Active and not Bypass. (See page 44.)

• The Reverb Depth setting or Modulation Speed setting is not 0. (See page 52.)

No sound is output from the Check that:

connected MIDI instruments • All MIDI connections have been properly made. (See pages 58, 59.)

• The receive channel of the connected device matches that of the Transmit Channel for

the P-150. (See page 47.)

• The MIDI Transmit switch is enabled. (See page 36.)

• The Volume level settings of connected devices are at appropriate levels.

APPENDIX

Cannot transmit MIDI messages Check that message types are turned off in the MIDI Filter menu of Edit mode, and that the

even though the MIDI Transmit Transmit channel is not set to off in Edit mode. (See page 47.)

switch is on

The sound of the connected Check that the Keyboard Sensitivity settings are appropriate. (See page 51.)

MIDI instruments is too soft

(or too loud)

Connected MIDI instruments Check that the program change receive (or the equivalent parameter) on the receiving MIDI

sound, but do not change instrument has not been turned off.

programs when changing voices

or Performances on the P-150

Sustain (Footswitch pedal Check that the Footswitch is properly connected to the [SUSTAIN] jack.

operation) doesn’t work properly

Cannot select the Organ 1 voice The Organ 1 voice is not accessible in Dual mode.

Transpose value or split point You cannot use the [DATA ENTRY] slider to change the transpose value or split point; you

cannot be changed by using must hold the [TRANSPOSE] or [SPLIT] button and use the [-1/NO] or [+1/YES] buttons.

the [DATA ENTRY] slider, Likewise, you cannot use the [-1/NO] or [+1/YES] buttons to change the balance or detune

or balance and detune values; you must hold the [BALANCE] or [DETUNE] button and move the [DATA ENTRY]

be values cannot changed by slider.

the [-1/NO] or [+1/YES] buttons

APPENDIX

■ Specifications

Keyboard 88-key (A-1 to C7), velocity sensitive, Action Effect II

Tone Generator AWM; 32-note maximum polyphony

Voices PIANO 1 ~ 2 (STEREO/MONO); PIANO 3 ~ 4; ELECTRIC PIANO 1 ~ 3; VIBES; ORGAN 1 ~ 2; STRINGS; BASS (ELECTRIC/UPRIGHT)

Play Modes Voice Play mode; Performance Play mode

Performances Performance Bank A (1 ~ 12); Performance Bank B (1 ~ 12)

Effects REVERB (ROOM, STAGE, HALL, OFF); MODULATION (CHORUS, SYMPHONIC, TREMOLO, OFF)

Panel Equalizer LOW; MIDDLE; HIGH

Edit SYSTEM MASTER TUNE 424.0Hz ~ 456.3Hz

REVERB bypass, active

DEVICE NUMBER off; 1 ~ 16; all

MIDI MERGE off; on

PERFORMANCE ENABLE

MIDI CHANNEL (sys; perf); LOCAL (sys; perf); CONTROLLER ASSIGN (sys; perf)

POPUP TIME PC (off; 1 ~ 5); OTHERS (1 ~ 5)

STORE TYPE auto store; non auto store

MIDI FILTER TRANSMIT FILTER Message Types; on/off

RECEIVE FILTER Message Types; on/off

PC TABLE PROGRAM CHANGE TRANSMIT VOICE/PERFORMANCE NO.(1 ~ 12); MSB/LSB (off; 0 ~ 127);

PROGRAM CHANGE NUMBER (off; 0 ~128)

PROGRAM CHANGE RECEIVE VOICE/PERFORMANCE NO. (off; 1 ~ 12);

PROGRAM CHANGE NUMBER (1 ~128)

CHANNEL TRANSMIT (off; 1 ~ 16); RECEIVE (off; 1 ~ 16; all)

LOCAL on; off

CS FC CS ASSIGN (functions) CS RANGE MIN (1 ~ 128); MAX (1 ~ 128)

FC ASSIGN (functions) FC RANGE MIN (1 ~ 128); MAX (1 ~ 128)

PS PS1 ASSIGN (off; start:FA; continue:FB; stop:FC)

PS2 ASSIGN (off; start:FA; continue:FB; stop:FC)

NAME PERFORMANCE NAME

ORGAN COMBINATION FOOTAGE 16’, 8’, 5-1/3’, 4’, 2-2/3’, 2’, 1-1/3’, 1’; (0 ~ 7)

RESPONSE (0 ~ 7)

ATTACK 4’, 2-2/3’, 2’; (0 ~ 7)

LENGTH (0 ~ 7)

Mode (First, Each)

PB MW PITCH BEND RANGE (0 ~ 12) MODULATION WHEEL ASSIGN (off; reverb depth; mod. speed; vibrato)

KBD SENS.

KEYBOARD SENSITIVITY INTERNAL

normal; soft-1~3; hard-1~3; fixed-1~3

KEYBOARD SENSITIVITY MIDI normal; soft-1~3; hard-1~3; fixed-1~3

KEYBOARD RANGE MIN (1 ~ 128); MAX (1 ~ 128)

INT. EQ LOW (-16 ~ 16); MID (-16 ~ 16); HIGH (-16 ~ 16)

REVERB TYPE (ROOM, STAGE, HALL, OFF); DEPTH (0 ~ 7)

MODULATION TYPE (CHORUS, SYMPHONIC, TREMOLO, OFF); SPEED (0 ~ 7)

Controls POWER; VOLUME; CS (DATA ENTRY); PS1 (-1/NO); PS2 (+1/YES); SPLIT (BALANCE, 1); TRANSPOSE (DETUNE, q);

MIDI (PAGE); LCD CONTRAST; PITCH WHEEL; MODULATION WHEEL; STORE; EDIT; PERF. A; PERF. B; VOICE; SELECT 1 ~ 12;

REVERB, MODULATION; EQUALIZER; SPEAKER ON/OFF

LCD screen 16-character x 2-row, backlit

Button Lamps SPLIT, TRANSPOSE, MIDI enable, STORE, EDIT, PERF. A, PERF. B, VOICE, 1 ~ 12 buttons, EFFECT x 6

Input Jacks FOOT CONTROLLER, SUSTAIN, SOSTENUTO, SOFT; LINE IN (L/MONO, R; 1/4” phone)

Output Jacks LINE OUT (L/MONO, R; unbalanced, 1/4” phone); PHONES

MIDI Terminals MIDI IN / OUT / THRU

Electrical Characteristics

Power Consumption: 70 W; Output Impedance: 600Ω; Input Impedance: 10 kΩ

Amplifiers 30 W x 2

Speakers 13 cm (5-1/8”) x 2

Dimensions 1385(W) x 424(D) x 159(H) mm (54-1/2” x 16-3/4” x 6-1/4”)

Weight 33.7kg (74 lbs.)

Included Accessory FC4 Footswitch

Optional Accessories

Yamaha FC4, FC5 Footswitches; Yamaha FC7 Foot Controller; Yamaha Keyboard Stand LP-3

Specifications and descriptions in this Owner’s Manual are for information purpose only. Yamaha Corp. reserves the right to change or modify products or

specifications at any time without prior notice. Since specifications, equipment or options may not be the same in every locale, please check with you Yamaha

dealer.

APPENDIX

MIDI CHANNEL

LOCAL ON/OFF

ASSIGN

PC SEND

OTHERS

Note On/Off

Control Change

Program Change

Aftertouch

Pitch Bend Change

Channel Mode Message

Parameter Change

Bulk

FA/FB/FC

Note On/Off

Control Change

Program Change

Pitch Bend Change

Channel Mode Message

Parameter Change

Bulk

NUMBER

BANK LSB

BANK MSB

NUMBER

MIDI TRANSMIT ENABLE SW

SYSTEM

MIDI FILTER

PROGRAM

CHANGE

TABLE

MASTER TUNE

REVERB

DEVICE NUMBER

MIDI MERGE

PERFORMANCE

ENABLE

POPUP TIME

STORE TYPE

TRANSMIT

RECEIVE

440.0

active

off

sys

off

non auto store

off

Voice 01,..,Perf. A01,..,Perf. B12 = 1,..,13,..,36

Voice 01,..,Perf. A01,..,Perf. B12 = off

1,..,36 = Voice 01,..,Perf. B12

SYSTEM

■ FACTORY DEFAULT SETTINGS

APPENDIX

PRESET VOICE LIST

PITCH BEND

MODULATION WHEEL

INTERNAL

MIDI

REVERB

MODULATION

INTERNAL EQUALIZER

CONTROLLERS

KBD SENS.

EFFECT

RANGE

ASSIGN

TYPE

RANGE MIN

RANGE MAX

TYPE

DEPTH

TYPE

SPEED

LOW

MID

HIGH

Piano 1

mod.speed

normal

128

hall

off

Piano 2

mod.speed

normal

128

stage

off

-3

Piano 3

mod.speed

soft-2

128

stage

off

-3

+10

Piano 4

mod.speed

soft-1

128

stage

off

-5

E.Piano1

mod.speed

hard-2

128

room

chorus

-9

E.Piano2

mod.speed

soft-3

128

stage

chorus

-7

-3

E.Piano3

mod.speed

hard-1

128

hall

symphonic

-11

VIBES

vibrato

hard-2

128

hall

tremolo

-7

ORGAN 1

mod.speed

fixed-1

128

hall

tremolo

ORGAN 2

mod.speed

fixed-1

128

room

tremolo

STRINGS

mod.speed

hard-3

128

hall

off

BASS

off

normal

128

room

chorus

-2

SINGLE DUAL SPLIT

Bass

Higher Note Range

SINGLE

Piano1

Strings

stereo

electric

Each

off

+12

off

main volume : 007

128

sub volume (internal)

128

PLAY MODE

VOICE

PIANO 1 STEREO/MONO

PIANO 2 STEREO/MONO

BASS ELECTRIC/UPRIGHT

ORGAN COMBINATION

BALANCE

DETUNE

SPLIT POINT

SPLIT MAIN VOICE AREA

TRANSPOSE

MIDI CHANNEL

LOCAL

CONTROLLERS

HOLD

ATTACK

ENABLE SWITCH

INTERNAL

MIDI

TX CHANNEL

RX CHANNEL

PS1

PS2

MAIN

SUB

16'

5-1/3'

2-2/3'

1-1/3'

RESPONSE

2-2/3'

LENGTH

EACH/FIRST

MAIN

SUB

MAIN

SUB

ASSIGN

RANGE MIN

RANGE MAX

ASSIGN

RANGE MIN

RANGE MAX

APPENDIX

MAIN

SUB

16'

5-1/3'

2-2/3'

1-1/3'

RESPONSE

2-2/3'

LENGTH

EACH/FIRST

MAIN

SUB

MAIN

SUB

ASSIGN

RANGE MIN

RANGE MAX

ASSIGN

RANGE MIN

RANGE MAX

HOLD

ATTACK

ENABLE SWITCH

INTERNAL

MIDI

TX CHANNEL

RX CHANNEL

PS1

PS2

PLAY MODE

VOICE

PIANO 1 STEREO/MONO

PIANO 2 STEREO/MONO

BASS ELECTRIC/UPRIGHT

ORGAN COMBINATION

BALANCE

DETUNE

SPLIT POINT

SPLIT MAIN VOICE AREA

TRANSPOSE

MIDI CHANNEL

LOCAL

CONTROLLERS

PERFORMANCE NAME

PITCH BEND

MODULATION WHEEL

INTERNAL

MIDI

REVERB

MODULATION

INTERNAL EQUALIZER

CONTROLLERS

KEYBOARD SENSITIVITY

EFFECT

RANGE

ASSIGN

TYPE

RANGE MIN

RANGE MAX

TYPE

DEPTH

TYPE

SPEED

LOW

MID

HIGH

SINGLE DUAL

SINGLE

Piano1

Strings

stereo

electric

Each

off

+12

off

main volume : 007

128

sub volume (internal)

128

Room Acoustic

mod.speed

normal

128

room

off

PERF. A 01

SPLIT

Bass

Higher Note

Range

Higher Note

Range

Higher Note

Range

Higher Note

Range

Higher Note

Range

SINGLE DUAL

PERF. A 02

SPLIT SINGLE DUAL

PERF. A 03

SPLIT

DUAL

Piano3

Piano2

stereo

electric

Each

off

+12

off

main volume : 007

128

sub volume (internal)

128

Honky Tonk

mod.speed

hard-2

128

room

off

-12

+16

-12

Bass

SINGLE

Piano3

Strings

stereo

electric

Each

off

+12

off

main volume : 007

128

sub volume (internal)

128

Pan Piano

mod.speed

normal

128

stage

tremolo

-13

-12

Bass

SINGLE DUAL

PERF. A 04

SPLIT

SINGLE

Piano4

Strings

stereo

electric

Each

off

+12

off

main volume : 007

128

sub volume (internal)

128

Chorus Piano

reverb depth

hard-2

128

hall

chorus

-1

-16

Bass

SINGLE DUAL

PERF. A 05

SPLIT

DUAL

Piano1

E.P.1

stereo

electric

Each

-2

off

+12

off

main volume : 007

128

sub volume (internal)

128

Ballad Piano

mod.speed

hard-2

128

stage

off

Bass

PRESET PERFORMANCE LIST

Higher Note

Range

Higher Note

Range

Higher Note

Range

Higher Note

Range

Higher Note

Range

Higher Note

Range

Higher Note

Range

SINGLE DUAL

PERF. A 06

SPLIT SINGLE DUAL

PERF. A 07

SPLIT SINGLE DUAL

PERF. A 08

SPLIT SINGLE DUAL

PERF. A 09

SPLIT SINGLE DUAL

PERF. A 10

SPLIT

DUAL

E.Piano1

Piano4

stereo

electric

Each

off

+12

off

main volume : 007

128

sub volume (internal)

128

Fusion Piano

mod.speed

normal

128

room

chorus

-5

Bass

DUAL

E.Piano1

E.P.2

stereo

electric

Each

-4

off

+12

off

main volume : 007

128

sub volume (internal)

128

Vintage EP

mod.speed

normal

128

stage

tremolo

-8

Bass

DUAL

E.Piano1

E.P.2

stereo

electric

Each

off

+12

off

main volume : 007

128

sub volume (internal)

128

Dynamic EP

mod.speed

hard-2

128

stage

chorus

-9

Bass

DUAL

E.Piano3

E.P.1

stereo

electric

Each

-5

off

+12

off

main volume : 007

128

sub volume (internal)

128

Ballad EP

mod.speed

hard-1

128

hall

chorus

-2

Bass

DUAL

E.Piano3

Piano1

stereo

electric

Each

off

+12

off

main volume : 007

128

sub volume (internal)

128

Bell EP

mod.speed

hard-1

128

hall

symphonic

-1

Bass

SINGLE DUAL

PERF. A 11

SPLIT

DUAL

Bass

E.P.1

stereo

upright

Each

-4

off

+12

off

main volume : 007

128

sub volume (internal)

128

Woody EP

mod.speed

normal

128

room

off

-5

Bass

SINGLE DUAL

PERF. A 12

SPLIT

SINGLE

E.Piano2

Strings

stereo

electric

Each

off

+12

off

main volume : 007

128

sub volume (internal)

128

Tremolo EP

mod.speed

normal

128

room

tremolo

-2

Bass

APPENDIX

MAIN

SUB

16'

5-1/3'

2-2/3'

1-1/3'

RESPONSE

2-2/3'

LENGTH

EACH/FIRST

MAIN

SUB

MAIN

SUB

ASSIGN

RANGE MIN

RANGE MAX

ASSIGN

RANGE MIN

RANGE MAX

HOLD

ATTACK

ENABLE SWITCH

INTERNAL

MIDI

TX CHANNEL

RX CHANNEL

PS1

PS2

PLAY MODE

VOICE

PIANO 1 STEREO/MONO

PIANO 2 STEREO/MONO

BASS ELECTRIC/UPRIGHT

ORGAN COMBINATION

BALANCE

DETUNE

SPLIT POINT

SPLIT MAIN VOICE AREA

TRANSPOSE

MIDI CHANNEL

LOCAL

CONTROLLERS

PERFORMANCE NAME

PITCH BEND

MODULATION WHEEL

INTERNAL

MIDI

REVERB

MODULATION

INTERNAL EQUALIZER

CONTROLLERS

KEYBOARD SENSITIVITY

EFFECT

RANGE

ASSIGN

TYPE

RANGE MIN

RANGE MAX

TYPE

DEPTH

TYPE

SPEED

LOW

MID

HIGH

SINGLE DUAL

SINGLE

Organ1

Strings

stereo

electric

Each

off

+12

off

main volume : 007

128

sub volume (internal)

128

Jazz Organ

mod.speed

normal

128

room

symphonic

-5

-4

PERF. B 01

SPLIT

Bass

SINGLE DUAL

PERF. B 02

SPLIT SINGLE DUAL

PERF. B 03

SPLIT

SINGLE

Organ1

Strings

stereo

electric

Each

off

+12

off

main volume : 007

128

sub volume (internal)

128

Pop Organ

mod.speed

normal

128

stage

tremolo

Bass

SINGLE

Organ1

Strings

stereo

electric

Each

off

+12

off

main volume : 007

128

sub volume (internal)

128

Blues Organ

mod.speed

normal

128

stage

symphonic

Bass

SINGLE DUAL

PERF. B 04

SPLIT

SINGLE

Organ1

Strings

stereo

electric

Each

-2

off

+12

off

main volume : 007

128

sub volume (internal)

128

Theater Organ

mod.speed

normal

128

stage

chorus

Bass

SINGLE DUAL

PERF. B 05

SPLIT

SINGLE

Organ1

Strings

stereo

electric

First

off

+12

off

main volume : 007

128

sub volume (internal)

128

Accomp. Organ

mod.speed

normal

128

stage

chorus

Bass

Higher Note

Range

Higher Note

Range

Higher Note

Range

Higher Note

Range

Higher Note

Range

SINGLE DUAL

PERF. B 06

SPLIT SINGLE DUAL

PERF. B 07

SPLIT SINGLE DUAL

PERF. B 08

SPLIT SINGLE DUAL

PERF. B 09

SPLIT SINGLE DUAL

PERF. B 10

SPLIT

DUAL

Vibes

E.P.1

stereo

electric

Each

-2

off

+12

off

main volume : 007

128

sub volume (internal)

128

Metal Attack

mod.speed

hard-2

128

stage

off

-1

-3

Bass

SINGLE

Strings

stereo

electric

Each

off

+12

off

main volume : 007

128

sub volume (internal)

128

Strings Orchestra

mod.speed

hard-2

128

hall

symphonic

Bass

DUAL

Piano1

Strings

stereo

electric

Each

off

+12

off

main volume : 007

128

sub volume (internal)

128

Romantic Piano

mod.speed

hard-3

128

hall

off

Bass

-3

SPLIT

Piano2

Strings

stereo

upright

Each

off

+12

off

main volume : 007

128

sub volume (internal)

128

Acoustic Duo

mod.speed

hard-1

128

stage

off

-3

Bass

SPLIT

E.Piano1

Strings

stereo

electric

Each

off

+12

off

main volume : 007

128

sub volume (internal)

128

Electric Duo

mod.speed

hard-2

128

stage

chorus

Bass

SINGLE DUAL

PERF. B 11

SPLIT

Vibes

Strings

stereo

upright

Each

off

+12

off

main volume : 007

128

sub volume (internal)

128

Jazz Duo

vibrato

hard-2

128

hall

symphonic

-2

Bass

-2

SINGLE DUAL

PERF. B 12

SPLIT

Organ2

Strings

stereo

electric

Each

off

+12

off

main volume : 007

128

sub volume (internal)

128

Rock Duo

vibrato

normal

128

room

chorus

-7

Bass

-3

Higher Note

Range

Higher Note

Range

Higher Note

Range

Higher Note

Range

Higher Note

Range

Higher Note

Range

Higher Note

Range

APPENDIX

MIDI CHANNEL

LOCAL ON/OFF

ASSIGN

PC SEND

OTHERS

Note On/Off

Control Change

Program Change

Aftertouch

Pitch Bend Change

Channel Mode Message

Parameter Change

Bulk

FA/FB/FC

Note On/Off

Control Change

Program Change

Pitch Bend Change

Channel Mode Message

Parameter Change

Bulk

NUMBER

BANK LSB

BANK MSB

NUMBER

BANK LSB

BANK MSB

NUMBER

BANK LSB

BANK MSB

NUMBER

MIDI TRANSMIT ENABLE SW

SYSTEM

MIDI FILTER

PROGRAM CHANGE TABLE

MASTER TUNE

REVERB

DEVICE NUMBER

MIDI MERGE

PERFORMANCE

ENABLE

POPUP TIME

STORE TYPE

TRANSMIT

RECEIVE

424.0Hz ~ 440.0Hz ~ 456.3Hz

active, bypass

off, 1~16, all

on, off

sys, perf

off, 1~5

1~5

auto store, non auto store

on, off

off, 1~128

off, 0~127

off/1 ~128

off, 1~128

off, 0~127

off/1 ~128

off, 1~128

off, 0~127

off/1 ~128

PARAMETERS

on, off

SYSTEM

Voice 02Voice 01 Voice 04Voice 03 Voice 06Voice 05 Voice 08Voice 07 Voice 10Voice 09 Voice 12Voice 11Voice 02Voice 01 Voice 04Voice 03 Voice 06Voice 05 Voice 08Voice 07 Voice 10Voice 09 Voice 12Voice 11

Perf. A02Perf. A01 Perf. A04Perf. A03 Perf. A06Perf. A05 Perf. A08Perf. A07 Perf. A10Perf. A09 Perf. A12Perf. A11

Perf. B02Perf. B01 Perf. B04Perf. B03 Perf. B06Perf. B05 Perf. B08Perf. B07 Perf. B10Perf. B09 Perf. B12Perf. B11

■ Blank Chart

APPENDIX

MAIN

SUB

16'

5-1/3'

2-2/3'

1-1/3'

RESPONSE

2-2/3'

LENGTH

EACH/FIRST

MAIN

SUB

MAIN

SUB

ASSIGN

RANGE MIN

RANGE MAX

ASSIGN

RANGE MIN

RANGE MAX

HOLD

ATTACK

ENABLE SWITCH

INTERNAL

MIDI

TX CHANNEL

RX CHANNEL

PS1

PS2

PLAY MODE

VOICE

PIANO 1 STEREO/MONO

PIANO 2 STEREO/MONO

BASS ELECTRIC/UPRIGHT

ORGAN COMBINATION

BALANCE

DETUNE

SPLIT POINT

SPLIT MAIN VOICE AREA

TRANSPOSE

MIDI CHANNEL

LOCAL

CONTROLLERS

PERFORMANCE NAME

PERFORMANCE

PARAMETERS

SINGLE, DUAL, SPLIT

(1) Piano 1 ~ (12) Bass

stereo, mono

electric, upright

0~7

-16~+15

0~7

A-1 ~ C7

-16~+15

on, off

-24~+24

off, 1~16

off, 1~16, ALL

on, off

off, FA, FB, FC

off, rev depth, mod speed, main, sub, ....., etc.

1~128

off, rev depth, mod speed, main, sub, ....., etc.

1~128

A~Z, a~z, 0~9, others

PITCH BEND

MODULATION WHEEL

INTERNAL

MIDI

REVERB

MODULATION

INTERNAL EQUALIZER

CONTROLLERS

KEYBOARD SENSITIVITY

EFFECT

RANGE

ASSIGN

TYPE

RANGE MIN

RANGE MAX

TYPE

DEPTH

TYPE

SPEED

LOW

MID

HIGH

SINGLE DUAL SPLIT

APPENDIX

2. MIDI TRANSMISSION/RECEPTION

2.1 MIDI Transmission Condition

■ MIDI DATA FORMAT

1. MIDI DATA FLOW

2.2 MIDI Reception Conditions

MIDI SW

MERGE

INTERNAL VELOCITY

CURVE

KEYBOARD

MIDI VELOCITY

CURVE

KBD OFFSET Min/Max

MIDI TRANSPOSE

INTERNAL

TRANSPOSE

Tx FILTER

Rx FILTER

LOCAL

MIDI IN MIDI OUT

P-150 TG

ACTIVE SENSING FE

PANIC

NOTE ON/OFF

PITCH BEND

MODULATION

PS 1/2

CONTINUOUS

SLIDER

FOOT

CONTROLLER

PROGRAM CHANGE

PARAMETER CHANGE

BULK DUMP

MIDI In

Bn (01H)

FA, FB, FC

Bn (00~77H)

Dn, (F0)

Bn (00~78H)

Dn, (F0)

P.C. Tx

TABLE

Txch

OUT

Device No.

Tx+1ch

MERGE SW

Tx Filter

MIDI SW

Split

P.C. Rx

TABLE

Rx Filter

Split

Rxch

Rx+1ch

Rxch

Rx+1ch

Rxch

Rx+1ch

Rxch

Rx+1ch

FE ACTIVE SENSING

MERGE

8n NOTE OFF

9n NOTE ON/OFF

Bn ,01 Modulation

,07 Volume

,40 Sustain

,42 Sostenuto

,43 Soft

Cn PROGRAM CHANGE

00H~0BH * (Voice)

0CH~23H * (Performance)

En PITCH BEND

BULK DUMP

BULK DUMP REQ.

PARAMETER CHANGE

Device No.

* (Voice) : Voice Play Mode (single) only

* (Performance) : Performance Play Mode only

APPENDIX

3. CHANNEL MESSAGES

3.1 Transmission

3.1.1 Note On/Off

[9nH]->[kk]->[vv]

9nH : Note on/off Status

n : Channel No.

kk : Key No.

Transpose : 21 (A-1) -108 (C7)

vv : Velocity

Key on : 0-127

Key off : 0

* Note range can be extended to 0-127 with MIDI TRANSPOSE

3.1.2 Control Change

Value

0 - 127

Control Change No.

0 -119

Controller

Modulation Wheel

Sustain Pedal

Sostenuto Pedal

Soft Pedal

3.1.3 Program Change

● When you choose a voice in Voice Play mode, a Program Change

Number corresponding to each selected button is transmitted.

● In Single mode, the Program Change Number corresponding to the

button according to the transmit channel is transmitted via the transmit

channel.

● In Dual mode, no sub voice Program Change Number is transmitted even

if you select the sub voice.

(Corresponding to Parameter Change (Exclusive))

● In Split mode, a Program Change Number is transmitted from the

transmit channel for the main voice and on the next highest channel

(Txch+1) for the sub voice according to the selected button.

3.1.4 Aftertouch

When Aftertouch is assigned to the CS or FC assignable controller, Channel

Pressure Data is transmitted.

3.1.5 Pitch Bend

Pitch Bend is transmitted with 7-bit resolution.

3.1.6 Channel Mode Message

When you press [Panic] switch (SW), <all sounds off>, <all notes off>,

<reset all controllers> will be transmitted.

See page 37 for detail.

3.2 Reception

3.2.1 Note On/Off

1. [9nH]->[kk]->[vv] n : channel no.

9nH : Note on/off status

kk : Key note

Reception : 0 (C-2) — 127 (G8)

vv : Velocity

Key on : 1-127

Key off : 0

2. [8nH]->[kk]->[vv] n : channel no.

8nH : Note off Status

kk : Key note

Reception : 0 (C-2) — 127 (G8)

vv : Velocity

Key off : 0-127

* Note range can be extended to 0-127 with MIDI TRANSPOSE

* The notes lower than 21 (A-1) and higher than 108 (C7) will repeat one-

octave higher and lower, respectively.

3.2.2 Control Change

[BnH]->[cc]->[vv]

BnH : Control Change Status

n : Channel No.

cc : Control No.

vv : Value

Value

0 - 127

Control Change No.

Parameter

Modulation Depth

Main Volume

Sustain

Sostenuto

Soft

3.2.3 Program Change

* In Voice Play mode if a Program Change Number from 1 to 12 is received,

the voice changes to one of the following voices from the next Key On

message.

RX Program

Change No.

Voice

Piano 1

Piano 2

Piano 3

Piano 4

E. Piano 1

E. Piano 2

E. Piano 3

Vibes

Organ 1

Organ 2

Strings

Bass

* In Performance Play mode if a Program Change Number from 1 to 12 is

received, the mode changes to Voice Play mode. If a Program Change

Number from 13 to 36 is received, the mode changes to Performance Play

mode and the Performance Number changes accordingly.

APPENDIX

RX Program

Change No.

Voice

Perf. A01

Perf. A02

Perf. B11

Perf. B12

* Any Bank Select message is ignored.

3.2.4 Aftertouch

Aftertouch is not received.

3.2.5 Pitch Bend

Only the MSB of the Pitch Bend is received.

3.2.6 Channel Mode

Channel Mode messages are received.

Value

00H

Control Change No.

Parameter

All Sounds Off

Reset all Controllers

All notes off

● Channel Mode messages are received by the Receive channel while

Omni Off is selected.

● All Sounds Off —

Reception is while Omni Off is selected only.

While Omni Off is selected, reception only occurs on the same Receive

channel, and Key On sounds are quickly silenced.

Different from All Notes Off, a dump is forcibly taken and sound is

silenced even when a damper or Sostenuto causes the sound after a Key

Off to continue or reduce slowly.

● All Notes Off —

While Omni Off is selected, only those sounds that occur during Key On

in the Receive Channel are silenced. Nothing is done while Omni On is

selected.

● Reset All Controllers —

While Omni Off is selected, only the Receive channel is reset to its initial

value. Nothing is done while Omni On is selected.

At reception, the status of the following items are reset to their initial

values:

Modulation Depth, Main Volume, Sustain, Soft, Sostenuto, and Pitch

Bend Depth. (Reverb Depth remains unchanged.)

Modulation Depth: Off Main Volume: Max

Sustain: Off Soft: Off

Sostenuto: Off Pitch Bend Depth (Center)

4. SYSTEM REAL TIME MESSAGES

When Start, Continue, or Stop is assigned to PS1/2 controller, System

Realtime messages are transmitted.

5. System Exclusive Messages

5.1 Parameter Change

5.1.1 System Setup

11110000 F0

01000011 43H

0001nnnn nnnn=Device Number

00101010 2A

00100000 20

00000000 00

0ppppppp ppppppp=N2

00000000 00

0vvvvvvv vvvvvvv=Data Value

11110111 F7

5.1.2 Voice

11110000 F0

01000011 43

0001nnnn nnnn=Device Number

00101010 2A

00100010 22

00000000 00

0ppppppp ppppppp=N2

00000000 00

0vvvvvvv vvvvvvv=Data Value

11110111 F7

5.1.3 Keyboard Mode

11110000 F0

01000011 43

0001nnnn nnnn=Device Number

00101010 2A

00100110 26

00000000 00

0ppppppp ppppppp=N2

00000000 00

0vvvvvvv vvvvvvv=Data Value

11110111 F7

5.1.4 Controller

11110000 F0

01000011 43

0001nnnn nnnn=Device Number

00101010 2A

00100111 27

00000000 00

0ppppppp ppppppp=N2

00000000 00

0vvvvvvv vvvvvvv=Data Value

11110111 F7

APPENDIX

● For more information about bulk dump format, see page 77.

● You can assign the device number in Edit mode, System function; see

page 44.

● When the device number is set to Off, bulk dump send and receive

operations cannot be executed.

● When MIDI Merge (Edit mode, System function) is set to On, the P-150

cannot send bulk dump messages.

● When the device numbers of the P-150 and the external device are not

matched, the P-150 cannot receive bulk dump messages.

● Bulk dump messages cannot be sent and received at the same time.

● When the MIDI Filter bulk setting (Edit mode, MIDI Filter function) is set

to On, bulk dump operations cannot be executed.

5.3 MIDI MERGE

The MIDI Merge function enables you to merge data received from the

MIDI IN termimal with data generated by the P-150, and transmits this

merged data. This function works as follows:

MIDI IN

OFF

MIDI OUT

BULK DUMP

MERGE ON/OFF SWITCH

1. Some features, such as Controller, might not operate as expected

because channel messages can also be transmitted on the same

channel as the MIDI channel that the P-150 uses for transmission.

(For example, in the case of Controller, an external device connected

to MIDI OUT uses the value determined by the most recently used

instrument, P-150 or an external device connected to MIDI IN. The

sounds from the P-150's tone generator might sometimes cut off

when receiving an All Notes Off message.)

2. A received Active Sensing message is never transmitted.

3. When an interrupt of the received Active Sensing is detected, transmission of

Active Sensing through MIDI OUT is interrupted after 500msec.

4. When the P-150 receives 32 or more bytes of System Exclusive

Messages, the MIDI messages transmitted by the P-150 might cause

an interruption.

(When System Exclusive Messages from MIDI IN are received, the MIDI

messages that the P-150 attempted to transmit are held temporarily;

however, if the data exceeds 31 bytes, the hold is released and after an

EOX is forcibly transmitted, the P-150 MIDI messages are transmitted.

In this case the data bytes being received are not transmitted until

reception of the status byte of non-System Realtime Messages, and are

discarded.)

5. When the MIDI Merge function is On, Bulk Dumps cannot be sent

from the P-150.

6. After the P-150 receives one status byte of the System Exclusive

Messages, if the status of other channel messages, etc., are received

before an EOX is received, the EOX is transmitted and other messages

(for example, channel messages) are separated from the System

Exclusive Messages and are transmitted.

* When MIDI Merge is On, the MIDI Panic feature does not work.

5.4 MIDI Panic

With the P-150, pressing the [MIDI]+[REVERB]+[MODULATION] buttons

suppresses MIDI transmission as an emergency method to shut down all sound.

● MIDI transmission

The following messages are transmitted :

Modulation Depth Off, Sustain Pedal Off, All Sound Off, All Note Off,

Reset All Controllers, Pitch Bend Depth (Center) and Channel Pressure

Off, for all channels.

● MIDI Panic transmission is not possible when the MIDI Merge function is On.

● MIDI Panic transmission is not possible during sending/receiving bulk data.

* The MIDI Panic feature is an emergency measure of last resort, so sound

sometimes might not stop.

5.1.5 MIDI Filter Table

11110000 F0

01000011 43

0001nnnn nnnn=Device Number

00101010 2A

00101100 2C

00000000 00

0ppppppp ppppppp=N2

0000000i i=Send switch

0vvvvvvv vvvvvvv=Data Value

11110111 F7

5.1.6 Program Change Transmit Table

11110000 F0

01000011 43

0001nnnn nnnn=Device Number

00101010 2A

00101110 2E

00000000 00

0iiiiiii iiiiiii=N1

0ppppppp ppppppp=N2

0000000i i=Send switch

0vvvvvvv vvvvvvv=Data Value2

11110111 F7

5.1.7 Program Change Receive Table

11110000 F0

01000011 43

0001nnnn nnnn=Device Number

00101010 2A

00101111 2F

00000000 00

0ppppppp ppppppp=N2

00000000 00

0vvvvvvv vvvvvvv=Data Value

11110111 F7

5.2 BULK DUMP (SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MESSAGES)

The system is capable of sending and receiving the following types of

bulk dump messages:

1. System Setup Bulk Dump

2. Voice Bulk Dump

3. Keyboard Mode Bulk Dump

4. MIDI Filter Table Bulk Dump

5. Program Change Transmit Table Bulk Dump

6. Program Change Receive Table Bulk Dump

The following three types of bulk dumps are sent and received:

1. All Bulk Dump

All six types of bulk dumps as listed above will be sent.

2. Performance Bulk Dump

Types 2 and 3, listed above, will be sent, for Performance Play mode

Performances A01 ~ A12 or B01 ~ 12.

3. Voice Bulk Dump

Types 2 and 3, listed above, will be sent, for Voice Play mode Voices 1 ~ 12

and Performance parameters.

The above six types of bulk dump messages can be received independently.

APPENDIX

19 13 ORGRESPONSE 0–7 Organ Combination Response

20 14 ORG.EF each/first Organ Attack Each/First

21 15 reserve

22 16 reserve

23 17 reserve

24 18 reserve

25 19 BAL DUAL -16 – +15 (o/b) Dual Balance

26 1A BAL SPLIT -16 – +15 (o/b) Split Balance

27 1B DETUNE 0–7 Dual Detune

28 1C SPOINT A-1–C7 Split Point

29 1D SAREA upper/lower Split Main Voice Area

30 1E SFTSW off/on Transpose Switch

31 1F SFTMAIN -24 – +24 (o/b) Main Voice Transpose

32 20 SFTSUB D -24 – +24 (o/b) Sub Voice Transpose (Dual)

33 21 SFTSUB S -24 – +24 (o/b) Sub Voice Transpose (Split)

34 22 SFTMAIN MD -24 – +24 (o/b) Main Voice MIDI Transpose

35 23 SFTSUB MD -24 – +24 (o/b) Sub Voice MIDI Transpose

36 24 LOCALSW off/on Local on/off Switch

37 25 TXCH 0–15, off TX Channel

38 26 RXCH 0–15, off, all Rx Channel

39 27 reserve

40 28 ASSPS1 0–3 PS1 Assign

41 29 ASSPS2 0–3 PS2 Assign

42 2A ASSCS 0–126 CS Assign

43 2B ASSCSMIN 0–127 CS Range Min

44 2C ASSCSMAX 0–127 CS Range Max

45 2D ASSFC 0–126 FC Assign

46 2E ASSFCMIN 0–127 FC Range Min

47 2F ASSFCMAX 0–127 FC Range Max

48 30 PERFNAME1 32–127 Performance Name 1

49 31 PERFNAME2 32–127 Performance Name 2

50 32 PERFNAME3 32–127 Performance Name 3

51 33 PERFNAME4 32–127 Performance Name 4

52 34 PERFNAME5 32–127 Performance Name 5

53 35 PERFNAME6 32–127 Performance Name 6

54 36 PERFNAME7 32–127 Performance Name 7

55 37 PERFNAME8 32–127 Performance Name 8

56 38 PERFNAME9 32–127 Performance Name 9

57 39 PERFNAME10 32–127 Performance Name 10

58 3A PERFNAME11 32–127 Performance Name 11

59 3B PERFNAME12 32–127 Performance Name 12

60 3C PERFNAME13 32–127 Performance Name 13

61 3D PERFNAME14 32–127 Performance Name 14

62 3E PERFNAME15 32–127 Performance Name 15

63 3F PERFNAME16 32–127 Performance Name 16

*1 Not possible for Dual mode with Organ 1 and another voice.

*2 Execute transmission only.

6.4 Controller

F0H, 43H, 1nH, 2AH, 27H, 00H, 00H, N2H, 00H, V2H, F7H

n : Device Number

N2H : Parameter Number

V2H : Parameter Value 2

N2 data name V2 (data range) note

0 00 reserve

1 01 reserve

2 02 VOL TTL 0–127 Total Volume

3 03 VAL MAIN 0–127 Main Voice Volume

4 04 VUL SUB 0–127 Sub Voice Volume

5 05 VIBSPD 0–127 Vibrato Speed Control

6 06 REVDEP 0–7 Reverb Depth Control

7 07 MODSPD 0–7 Modulation Speed Control

* Transmitted and received when allocated to the assignable Controller.

6. PARAMETER CHANGE TABLE

6.1 System Setup

F0H, 43H, 1nH, 2AH, 20H, 00H, 00H, N2H, 00H, V2H, F7H

n : Device Number

N2H : Parameter Number

V2H : Parameter Value 2

N2 data name V2 (data range) note

0 00 MTUNE -64 – +63 (o/b) Master Tuning

1 01 MENABSW off/on MIDI Tx Enable SW

2 02 MREVSW bypass/active Reverb Bypass SW

3 03 MERGSW off/on Merge SW

4 04 PERFCHSW sys/perf

Performance Channel Enable SW

5 05 PERFLOSW sys/perf Performance Local Enable SW

6 06 PERFASSSW sys/perf

Performance Controller Assign Enable SW

7 07 POPUPPC off, 1, ....., 5 Popup Time P.C. Send

8 08 POPUPOTHER 1, ...., 5 Popup Time Other

9 09 STORETYPE auto store/ Store Type

non auto store auto store / non auto store

10 0A DEVNUM 1–16, all, off Device Number

6.2 Voice

F0H, 43H, 1nH, 2AH, 22H, 00H, 00H, N2H, 00H, V2H, F7H

n : Device Number

N2H : Parameter Number

V2H : Parameter Value 2

N2 data name V2 (data range) note

0 00 PBRANGE 0–12 PB Range

1 01 MODASS 0–3 Modulation Wheel Assign

2 02 INTVELCRV 0–9 Int. KBD Sens.Type

3 03 RXVELCRV 0–9 MIDI KBD Sens. Type

4 04 VELMIN 0–127 KBD Range Min

5 05 VELMAX 0–127 KBD Range Max

6 06 REVTYPE 0–3 Effect Reverb Type

7 07 REVDPT 0–7 Effect Reverb Depth

8 08 MODTYPE 0–3 Effect Modulation Type

9 09 MODSPD 0–7 Effect Modulation Speed

10 0A INTEQL -16 – +16 (o/b) Internal Equalizer Low

11 0B INTEQM -16 – +16 (o/b) Internal Equalizer Mid

12 0C INTEQH -16 – +16 (o/b) Internal Equalizer High

6.3 Keyboard Mode

F0H, 43H, 1nH, 2AH, 26H, 00H, 00H, N2H, 00H, V2H, F7H

n : Device Number

N2H : Parameter Number

V2H : Parameter Value 2

N2 data name V2 (data range) note

0 00 PMODE 0–2 Play Mode

0: Single/ 1: Dual/ 2: Split

1 01 VMAIN 0–11 Main Voice Number *1 2*

2 02 VDUAL 0–11 Sub Voice Number (Dual) *1

3 03 VSPLIT 0–11 Sub Voice Number (Split) 2*

4 04 VP1MONO stereo/mono Piano1 stereo/mono

5 05 VP2MONO stereo/mono Piano2 stereo/mono

6 06 VBASSEW elec./upright Bass elec./upright

7 07 ORGCMB16 0–7 Organ Combination 16'

8 08 ORGCMB8 0–7 Organ Combination 8'

9 09 ORGCMB513 0–7 Organ Combination 5+1/3'

10 0A ORGCMB4 0–7 Organ Combination 4'

11 0B ORGCMB223 0–7 Organ Combination 2+2/3'

12 0C ORGCMB2 0–7 Organ Combination 2'

13 0D ORGCMB113 0–7 Organ Combination 1+1/3'

14 0E ORGCMB1 0–7 Organ Combination 1'

15 0F ORGATK4 0–7 Organ Attack 4'

16 10 ORGATK223 0–7 Organ Attack 2+2/3'

17 11 ORGATK2 0–7 Organ Attack 2'

18 12 ORGATKLEN 0–7 Organ Attack Length

APPENDIX

6.5 MIDI Filter

F0H, 43H, 1nH, 2AH, 2CH, 00H, 00H, N2H, 00H, 2VH, F7H

n : Device Number

N2H : Parameter Number

V2H : Parameter Value 2

N2 data name V2 (data range) note

0 00 TXMFILNOTE off/on Tx MIDI Filter Note on/off

1 01 TXMFILCTRL off/on Tx MIDI Filter Ctrl Change

2 02 TXMFILPC off/on Tx MIDI Filter Prog. Change

3 03 TXMFILAFT off/on Tx MIDI Filter Aftertouch

4 04 TXMFILPB off/on Tx MIDI Filter Pitch Bend

5 05 TXMFILCH off/on Tx MIDI Filter Channel Message

6 06 TXMFILPRM off/on Tx MIDI Filter Exclusive

7 07 TXMFILBULK off/on Tx MIDI Filter Bulk

8 08 TXMFILSYS off/on Tx MIDI Filter FA/FB/FC

9 09 RXMFILNOTE off/on Rx MIDI Filter Note on/off

10 0A RXMFILCTRL off/on Rx MIDI Filter Ctrl Change

11 0B RXMFILPC off/on Rx MIDI Filter Prog. Change

12 0C reserve

13 0D RXMFILPB off/on Rx MIDI Filter Pitch Bend

14 0E RXMFILCH off/on Rx MIDI Filter Channel Message

15 0F RXMFILPRM off/on Rx MIDI Filter Exclusive

16 10 RXMFILBULK off/on Rx MIDI Filter Bulk

6.6 Program Change Transmit Table

F0H, 43H, 1nH, 2AH, 2EH, 00H, N1H, N2H, V1H, V2H, F7H

n : Device Number

N1H : Parameter Number

N2H : Parameter Number

V1H : Parameter Value 1 (= 1 don't send P.C.)

V2H : Parameter Value 2

N2 data name V2 (data range) note

0 00 TXPGM1 0–127 Voice 01

: : : 0–127 :

11 03 TXPGM12 0–127 Voice 12

12 04 TXPGM13 0–127 Perf. A01

: : : 0–127 :

23 17 TXPGM24 0–127 Perf. A12

24 18 TXPGM25 0–127 Perf. B01

: : : 0–127 :

35 23 TXPGM36 0–127 Perf. B12

N1 data name

00 TX P.C. Data

01 Bank Select MSB

02 Bank Select LSB

6.7 Program Change Receive Table

F0H, 43H, 1nH, 2AH, 2FH, 00H, 00H, N2H, 00H, V2H, F7H

n : Device Number

N2H : Parameter Number.

V2H : Parameter Value 2

N2 data name V2 (data range) note

0 00 RXPGM1 Voice 01–Perf. B12, off Program Change Number1

1 01 RXPGM2 Voice 01–Perf. B12, off Program Change Number 2

2 02 RXPGM3 Voice 01–Perf. B12, off Program Change Number 3

:: : : :

126 7E RXPGM127 Voice 01–Perf. B12, off

Program Change Number 127

127 7F RXPGM128 Voice 01–Perf. B12, off

Program Change Number 128

7. BULK DUMP

7.1 System Setup & Dump Request

SYSTEM SETUP

data

0 F0H

143H

2 0NH

3 7AH

bytes

10 2

11 4

12 9

13 0

14 S

15 Y

↓ 00H

Supplement: Parameter Change

1. 00H–0AH of system setup

32 MTUNE

↓

42 DEVNUM

43 check_sum

44 F7H

DUMP REQUEST

data

0 F0H

143H

2 2NH

3 7AH

10 9

11 0

12 S

13 Y

↓ 00H

30 F7H

APPENDIX

7.2 Voice

type 1: 00H

type 2: Voice Number

type2 VOICE NUMBER

00H Voice 01

01H Voice 02

02H Voice 03

03H Voice 04

04H Voice 05

05H Voice 06

06H Voice 07

07H Voice 08

08H Voice 09

09H Voice 10

0AH Voice 11

0BH Voice 12

0CH Perf. A01 Voice

0DH Perf. A02 Voice

0EH Perf. A03 Voice

0FH Perf. A04 Voice

10H Perf. A05 Voice

11H Perf. A06 Voice

12H Perf. A07 Voice

13H Perf. A08 Voice

14H Perf. A09 Voice

15H Perf. A10 Voice

16H Perf. A11 Voice

17H Perf. A12 Voice

18H Perf. B01 Voice

19H Perf. B02 Voice

1AH Perf. B03 Voice

1BH Perf. B04 Voice

1CH Perf. B05 Voice

1DH Perf. B06 Voice

1EH Perf. B07 Voice

1FH Perf. B08 Voice

20H Perf. B09 Voice

21H Perf. B10 Voice

22H Perf. B11 Voice

23H Perf. B12 Voice

VOICE

data

0 F0H

1 43H

2 0NH

3 7AH

bytes

10 2

11 4

12 9

13 0

14 V

15 0

↓ 00H

30 type 1

31 type 2

Supplement: Parameter Change

2. 00H–12H of Voice

32 PBRANGE

↓

44 INTEQH

45 check_sum

46 F7H

DUMP REQUEST

data

0 F0H

143H

2 2NH

3 7AH

10 9

11 0

12 V

13 0

↓ 00H

28 type 1

29 type 2

30 F7H

APPENDIX

7.4 MIDI Filter Table Bulk Dump

P.C. TX TABLE

data

0 F0H

143H

2 ONH

3 7AH

bytes

10 2

11 4

12 9

13 0

14 M

15 F

↓ 00H

Supplement: Parameter Change

4. 00H–10H of MIDI Filter Table

32 TXMFILNOTE

↓

48 RXMFILBULK

49 check_sum

50 F7H

DUMP REQUEST

data

0 F0H

143H

2 2NH

3 7AH

10 9

11 0

12 M

13 F

↓ 00H

30 F7H

7.3 Keyboard Mode

type 1: 00H

type 2: Performance Number

type2 PERFORMANCE NUMBER

00H Perf. A01

0BH Perf. A12

0CH Perf. B01

17H Perf. B12

18H Voices

DUMP REQUEST

data

0 F0H

1 43H

2 2NH

3 7AH

10 9

11 0

12 K

13 B

↓ 00H

28 type 1

29 type 2

30 F7H

KEYBOARD MODE

data

0 F0H

1 43H

2 0NH

3 7AH

bytes

10 2

11 4

12 9

13 0

14 K

15 B

↓ 00H

30 type 1

31 type 2

Supplement: Parameter Change

3. 00H–3FH of Keyboard Mode

32 PMODE

↓

95 PERFNAME 16

96 check_sum

97 F7H

APPENDIX

7.6 Program Change Receive Table Bulk Dump

DUMP REQUEST

data

0 F0H

143H

2 2NH

3 7AH

10 9

11 0

12 P

13 R

↓ 00H

30 F7H

P.C. Tx TABLE

data

0 F0H

1 43H

2 0NH

3 7AH

bytes

10 2

11 4

12 9

13 0

14 P

15 R

↓ 00H

Supplement: Parameter Change

6. 00H–7FH of Program Change

Receive Table

32 RXPGM1

↓

159 RXPGM128

160 check_sum

161 F7H

7.5 Program Change Transmit Table Bulk Dump

type 1: 00H

type 2: Voice No.

type 2 VOICE NUMBER

00H P.C.Data

01H Bank Select MSB

02H Bank Select LSB

P.C. Tx TABLE

data

0 F0H

1 43H

2 0NH

3 7AH

bytes

10 2

11 4

12 9

13 0

14 P

15 T

↓ 00H

30 type 1

31 type 2

Supplement: Parameter Change

5. 00H–35H of Program Change

Transmit Table

32 TXPGM1 (MSB)

33 TXPGM1 (LSB)

↓

102 TXPGM36 (MSB)

103 TXPGM36 (LSB)

104 check_sum

105 F7H

DUMP REQUEST

data

0 F0H

1 43H

2 2NH

3 7AH

10 9

11 0

12 P

13 T

↓ 00H

28 type 1

29 type 2

30 F7H

Name (Performance)...........................................................50

Organ Combination .............................................................50

Panel Switch (PS)................................................................50

PERFORMANCE PLAY MODE...........................................38

Performance Enable............................................................45

Performance Name .............................................................50

Performance Parameters ....................................................12

Pitch Bend Range................................................................51

Play Modes..........................................................................10

Popup Time .........................................................................45

PRECAUTIONS.....................................................................2

Preset Performance List......................................................64

Preset Voice List..................................................................63

Program Change (PC) Table...............................................46

Program Change Receive ...................................................47

Program Change Transmit ..................................................46

REAR PANEL........................................................................9

Receive Filter.......................................................................46

Reverb...........................................................................22, 52

Reverb Bypass ....................................................................44

Single Mode.........................................................................20

Specifications ......................................................................63

Split Mode............................................................................28

Split point.......................................................................29, 31

Stereo/Mono Piano..............................................................21

STORE ................................................................................53

Store Type...........................................................................45

System.................................................................................44

System Settings...................................................................13

Transmit Filter......................................................................46

Transpose............................................................................33

Troubleshooting...................................................................61

UPPER PANEL .....................................................................4

Velocity Curves....................................................................52

VOICE PLAY MODE ...........................................................19

Voice Parameters................................................................11

Voices and Polyphony.........................................................20

APPENDIX

■ INDEX

APPENDIX ..........................................................................55

Auto Store............................................................................45

Backup Battery ......................................................................2

Balance (Dual).....................................................................27

Balance (Split) .....................................................................30

Bank Select (PC Table).......................................................47

Bass, Electric/Upright ..........................................................21

Blank Chart..........................................................................64

Bulk Dump...........................................................................55

Channel ...............................................................................47

Continuous Slider (CS)........................................................48

CS FC..................................................................................48

Demo Songs........................................................................17

Detune.................................................................................27

Device Number....................................................................44

Dual Mode ...........................................................................26

EDIT MODE.........................................................................42

Edit Menu Tree....................................................................42

Equalizer (Internal) ..............................................................52

Equalizer (Panel).................................................................24

Error Messages ...................................................................60

Foot Controller (FC).............................................................48

GETTING STARTED...........................................................14

Initialize................................................................................56

Internal Control Functions ...................................................49

Internal Equalizer.................................................................52

Keyboard Sensitivity............................................................51

Local....................................................................................48

Main and Sub Voices.....................................................25, 32

Master Tune ........................................................................44

MIDI (Using MIDI)................................................................57

MIDI Control Change Messages .........................................49

MIDI Data Format................................................................72

MIDI Filter............................................................................46

MIDI Implementation Chart..................................................81

MIDI Merge..........................................................................44

MIDI Panic...........................................................................37

MIDI System Connections...................................................58

MIDI Transmit Enable..........................................................36

Modulation.....................................................................23, 52

Modulation Wheel Assign....................................................51

Documenttranscriptie

■ Dual and Split voice modes Congratulations! …and thank you for purchasing the Yamaha P-150. The P-150 is a high-performance electronic piano with full-scale, weighted action keyboard, a selection of high quality piano and other useful instrument voices, and versatile performance and other advanced features which make it ideal for professional stage and studio applications, as well as for home entertainment and music study use. The P150’s main features include: The P-150’s Dual and Split modes let you play two voices at once, a “main” voice and a “sub” voice, either by layering the two voices of your choice (Dual mode) or by assigning a different voice to each end of the keyboard (Split mode). In Split mode, the key transposition values can be set independently for both main and sub voices. ■ One-touch Performance recall The P-150 features a Performance Play mode that lets you store up to 24 Performances, or configurations of all voice, MIDI and other parameter settings, for recall at the touch of a button. This lets you instantly change your sound and entire setup as you play, or between songs in a live set. The P-150 is set at the factory with 24 Preset Performances, but you can overwrite them and store User Performances which you create yourself. The P150 features extensive editing and storing capabilities. ■ High quality AWM piano and other sounds The P-150 features a selection of twelve high quality instrument voices generated by Yamaha’s patented AWM (Advanced Wave Memory) sound generation technology. There are several piano sounds—including a concert grand piano, with full-bodied bass tones and reverberating high notes, that accurately captures the natural characteristics of a real grand piano—plus various electric pianos, vibes, organ combinations, strings and electric and upright bass. With a maximum simultaneous “polyphonic” note output of 32 notes, the P-150 delivers uncompromising performance capabilities. ■ Master keyboard features The P-150 offers many of the control features standard in a MIDI master keyboard, including velocity sensitivity, pitch bend and modulation wheels, an assignable CS (continuous slider), program change send and receive capabilities, MIDI transpose and merge functions, and bulk dumping and multitimbral capabilities. Plus, the P-150 gives you the option of connecting a foot controller (FC) that can be assigned MIDI and other functions in the same manner as the CS. With its powerful MIDI capabilities, the P-150 can easily feature at the heart of an expanded MIDI system. ■ Organ combination editing The P-150 comes equipped with two preset organ voices, plus organ combination editing features which let you create your own organ sounds and store them in Performances for instant recall. The organ combination editing features give you precise control over flute footages as well as attack settings. How to Use this Manual This owner’s manual is organized and designed to help you get set up and begin enjoying the P-150 as quickly as possible, as well as to easily locate and learn about any feature you need. The GETTING STARTED section briefly but thoroughly explains the proper procedure for setting up the instrument, listening to the onboard Demo songs, and exploring the basic voices. The VOICE PLAY MODE, PERFORMANCE PLAY MODE and EDIT MODE sections include explanations of each feature and step-bystep details about how to access and manipulate the many parameters. An APPENDIX provides Voice and Performance lists and other technical information, including descriptions of error messages and a troubleshooting guide, plus MIDI specifications and other MIDI related information. Finally, an alphabetical INDEX lets you quickly reference the page number of any feature you want to locate. ■ Digital signal processing The P-150 has a built-in digital signal processor that lets you apply stereo reverb, chorus, symphonic and tremolo effects to the voices, and lets you tailor the quality of the voices to suit your needs with an internal equalizer, as well as a three-band graphic equalizer on the upper panel. ■ Touch-sensitive keyboard with velocity scaling The P-150’s full-range 88-key, weighted action piano keyboard incorporates Yamaha’s unique Action Effect II keyboard technology, which gives it the genuine feel and response of a real piano keyboard. You can even adjust the keyboard’s sensitivity level, or velocity scaling, to suit your playing style, for both internal tone generator and MIDI message transmission. Special Symbols Throughout this manual two special symbols are used to connote additional information. Indicates an important cautionary note for the feature being described. Indicates a supplementary explanation for the feature being described. 1 ■ Location ■ Extended Disuse Do not use the P-150 in locations where it will be exposed to direct sunlight, extreme temperatures, high humidity or excessive dust or vibration. Electrical storms can cause power surges which can damage the P-150’s circuitry even if the power switch is turned off. Therefore, it is best to disconnect the P-150’s power cord from the AC outlet when you will not be using it for an extended period of time. ■ Handling ■ Service and Modification Avoid rough handling. Do not drop the P-150 or subject it to shock, as these can damage the instrument’s internal circuitry. Also, do not apply excessive force to the controls or terminals. When moving the P-150, first unplug the AC power cord and all other cables to prevent damage to the cords and jacks. When removing plugs from terminals, always grip the plugs directly rather than pulling on the cord. The P-150 contains no user serviceable parts, so never open the instrument’s cabinet or tamper with the internal circuitry or mechanisms in any way. Doing so can result in electrical shock or damage to the P-150. Refer all servicing to qualified Yamaha service personnel. ■ Backup Battery ■ Cleaning The P-150’s internal settings are preserved by a lithium backup battery which has a life span of approximately five years. (The battery’s life span may differ, depending on the time elapsed between your P-150’s date of manufacture and the date you purchased it.) When the battery charge runs low, the “ERROR1 REPLACE BATTERY” error message will appear in the LCD screen. If this message appears, save any settings you may want to keep to an external data storage device (such as the Yamaha MDF2 Data Filer) using the bulk dump procedure, then contact a qualified Yamaha service center to have the battery replaced. Do not attempt to replace the backup battery yourself! To clean the P-150, use a slightly moist cloth and a neutral cleanser. Do not use abrasive cleansers, waxes, solvents, or chemically treated cloths, as these may damage the cabinet’s finish or dull the keys. ■ AC Power The power requirements of your P-150 has been set to match the main power supply voltage in your area. Make sure that your local AC mains voltage matches the voltage as specified on the name plate located on the rear panel of your P-150. If you plan to use your P-150 in an area with a different voltage, be sure to use an appropriate converter. If you have any doubts about voltage compatibility, please consult your local Yamaha dealer. YAMAHA CANNOT BE HELD RESPONSIBLE FOR DAMAGE CAUSED BY IMPROPER HANDLING OR OPERATION OF THE P-150! ■ Electromagnetic Interference Avoid using your P-150 near televisions, radios or other devices which generate electromagnetic fields, as electromagnetic interference can cause the P-150 to malfunction, and may generate interference noise in the other devices as well. The LCD screen displays as illustrated in this manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear somewhat different from your P-150’s. 2 INTRODUCTION............................................................................................................ 1 PRECAUTIONS ............................................................................................................. 2 UPPER PANEL .............................................................................................................. 4 REAR PANEL ................................................................................................................ 9 P-150 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................................... 10 GETTING STARTED ................................................................................................... 14 Setting up the P-150 ............................................................................................................. 14 Turning on the Power ........................................................................................................... 16 Playing the Demo Songs ...................................................................................................... 17 Playing the Voices ................................................................................................................ 18 UPPER PANEL REAR PANEL VOICE PLAY MODE .................................................................................................... 19 Single Mode.......................................................................................................................... 20 Stereo/Mono Piano ............................................................................................................... 21 Electric/Upright Bass ............................................................................................................ 21 Reverb Effects ...................................................................................................................... 22 Modulation Effects ................................................................................................................ 23 Panel Equalizer..................................................................................................................... 25 Main and Sub Voices............................................................................................................ 25 Dual Mode ............................................................................................................................ 26 Split Mode............................................................................................................................. 28 Transpose............................................................................................................................. 33 MIDI Transmit Enable ........................................................................................................... 36 MIDI Panic ............................................................................................................................ 37 PERFORMANCE PLAY MODE ................................................................................... 38 Selecting Single Voices ........................................................................................................ 39 Selecting Dual Voices........................................................................................................... 40 Selecting Split Voices ........................................................................................................... 40 EDIT MODE ................................................................................................................. 42 System .................................................................................................................................. 44 MIDI Filter ............................................................................................................................. 46 Program Change (PC) Table ................................................................................................ 46 Channel ................................................................................................................................ 47 Local ..................................................................................................................................... 48 Continuous Slider (CS) / Foot Controller (FC) ...................................................................... 48 Panel Switch (PS)................................................................................................................. 50 Name .................................................................................................................................... 50 Organ Combination............................................................................................................... 50 Pitch Bend Wheel (PB) / Modulation Wheel (MW) ............................................................... 51 Keyboard Sensitivity ............................................................................................................. 51 Internal Equalizer.................................................................................................................. 52 Reverb .................................................................................................................................. 52 Modulation ............................................................................................................................ 52 P-150 OVERVIEW GETTING STARTED VOICE PLAY MODE PERFORMANCE PLAY MODE EDIT MODE STORE STORE......................................................................................................................... 53 APPENDIX ................................................................................................................... 55 Bulk Dump .............................................................................................................................55 Initialize ................................................................................................................................. 56 Using MIDI ............................................................................................................................ 57 Error Messages .................................................................................................................... 60 Troubleshooting .................................................................................................................... 61 Specifications.........................................................................................................................63 Factory Default Settings ........................................................................................................64 Blank Chart ............................................................................................................................70 MIDI Data Format ..................................................................................................................72 MIDI Implementation Chart ....................................................................................................81 Index ......................................................................................................................................82 3 APPENDIX UPPER PANEL B VOLUME POWER CS CONTRAST MAX PS1 PS2 -1/NO +1/YES SPLIT TRANSPOSE BALANCE DETUNE MIDI MIN ON/ OFF DATA ENTRY PITCH PAGE MODULATION A 1 1 [PHONES] jack 3 Speakers This jack on the front panel lets you connect a pair of stereo headphones to the P-150 for private listening. The internal speakers will automatically be disconnected when you plug in the headphones. The sound of the internal voices output from the [OUTPUT] jacks is not affected. These two built-in 13 cm speakers each provide an output of 20 watts. If you connect the P-150 to an external monitor system, you may choose to turn the speakers off using the [SPEAKER] switch located on the rear panel. 2 Keyboard This 88-key weighted action, touch-sensitive keyboard incorporates Yamaha’s unique Action Effect II keyboard technology, which gives it the genuine feel and response of a real piano keyboard. 4 C3 IN OUT MIDI THRU FOOT CONTROLLER SOFT L/MONO OUTPUT SOSTENUTO SUSTAIN L/MONO INPUT R R UPPER PANEL 3 OFF ON SPEAKER C STORE EFFECT PERF. A REVERB 1 EDIT PERF.B VOICE PIANO 1 SYSTEM 2 PIANO 2 3 PIANO 3 MIDI FILTER PC TABLE 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 PIANO 4 E.PIANO 1 E.PIANO 2 E.PIANO 3 VIBES ORGAN1 ORGAN2 STRINGS BASS CHANNEL LOCAL CS FC PS NAME ORGAN COMBINATION PB MW KBD SENS. INT.EQ EQUALIZER MODULATION ROOM CHORUS STAGE SYMPHONIC HALL TREMOLO LOW MIDDLE HIGH 2 5 ■ UPPER PANEL—A POWER 1 ON/ OFF UPPER PANEL 2 PITCH 3 MODULATION 1 [POWER] switch 3 [MODULATION] wheel This switch turns the power on and off. When the power is turned on, the mode and status designated when the power was previously turned off will still be active. This wheel can be used in various ways. Normally you will use it to apply a vibrato effect to the notes that you play, with increasing intensity as you roll it upwards; the wheel remains at the specific position that you set it when you let go of it. (In Dual mode, both voices are modulated; in Split mode, only the main voice is modulated. The vibrato effect cannot be applied to Piano voices 1 ~ 4.) You can also assign it to control reverb depth or modulation speed. When MIDI transmission is enabled, you can use it to transmit modulation messages to other instruments. 2 [PITCH] wheel This wheel can be used to bend the pitch of the notes that you play, up or down; the wheel automatically returns to the center position when you release it. (In Dual mode, both voices are affected; in Split mode, only the main voice is affected.) When the MIDI Transmit Switch is enabled, you can use it to transmit pitch bend messages to other instruments. You can assign the pitch bend range to any value within a one-octave range. 6 ■ UPPER PANEL— B 2 3 4 5 6 CS VOLUME 8 9 UPPER PANEL 1 CONTRAST MAX PS1 PS2 -1/NO +1/YES SPLIT TRANSPOSE BALANCE DETUNE MIDI MIN DATA ENTRY PAGE C3 7 1 [VOLUME] slider 6 [TRANSPOSE, DETUNE, q] button This slider adjusts the overall volume of sound output from the internal speakers (or headphones, if connected) as well as the sound output from the [OUTPUT] jacks on the rear panel. Moving the slider upward increases volume level, while moving the slider downward decreases volume level. This is a multiple function button. As a [TRANSPOSE] button, you can use it to set the keyboard transpose value for single as well as both Dual voices or Split voices. As a [DETUNE] button, you can use it to set the detune value for the two Dual voices, by holding it and moving the [DATA ENTRY] slider ". As a [q] (cursor right) button in Edit mode, you can use it to move the cursor to the right in the LCD screen in order to position it over a desired parameter. 2 [CS, DATA ENTRY] slider This is a multiple function slider. As a [CS] (continuous slider), you can assign it to control a variety of functions. As a [DATA ENTRY] slider, you can use it to change specific settings and parameters, depending on the current mode and status. Moving the slider upward increases the specified value, while moving the slider downward decreases the specified value. 7 [MIDI, PAGE] button This is a dual function button. As a [MIDI] transmit button, you can use it to quickly enable or disable the P-150’s transmission of MIDI messages. You can also hold the [MIDI] button while pressing other buttons to access certain features. As a [PAGE] button, you can use it to step through the various pages of Edit functions when the P-150 is in Edit mode. 3 [PS1, –1/NO] button This is a dual function button. As a [PS1] (Panel Switch 1) button, you can assign it to control various functions of the internal voices as well as connected MIDI devices, as set by the PS Edit function. As a [–1/NO] button, you can use it to change parameter settings in decrements. 8 [CONTRAST] dial This dial lets you adjust the contrast of the LCD screen for optimum visibility. Rotating it to the left will decrease screen contrast, while rotating it to the right will increase screen contrast. 4 [PS2, +1/YES] button This is a dual function button. As a [PS2] (Panel Switch 2) button, you can assign it to control various functions of the internal voices as well as connected MIDI devices, as set by the PS Edit function. As a [+1/YES] button, you can use it to change parameter settings in increments. 9 LCD screen This backlit 32-character Liquid Crystal Display screen provides various information about the modes and operating status of the P-150. Certain messages are displayed only temporarily, but you can designate the “Popup Time” according to your preference. 5 [SPLIT, BALANCE, 1] button This is a multiple function button. As a [SPLIT] button, you can use it to enter Split mode, whether in Voice Play or Performance Play mode, determine the split point and assign the keyboard area for the main and sub voices. As a [BALANCE] button, you can use it to set the relative volume levels of each Split and Dual voice, by holding the [BALANCE] button and moving the [DATA ENTRY] slider ". As a [1] (cursor left) button in Edit mode, you can use it to move the cursor to the left in the LCD screen in order to position it over a desired parameter. 7 ■ UPPER PANEL—C 1 3 STORE PERF. A 4 5 6 7 EFFECT REVERB UPPER PANEL EDIT PERF.B 8 VOICE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 PIANO 1 PIANO 2 PIANO 3 PIANO 4 E.PIANO 1 E.PIANO 2 E.PIANO 3 VIBES ORGAN1 ORGAN2 STRINGS BASS CHANNEL LOCAL CS FC PS NAME ORGAN COMBINATION PB MW KBD SENS. INT.EQ SYSTEM MIDI FILTER PC TABLE EQUALIZER MODULATION ROOM CHORUS STAGE SYMPHONIC HALL TREMOLO LOW MIDDLE HIGH 2 1 [STORE] button 5 [VOICE, PERFORMANCE, EDIT SELECT] buttons This button lets you store changes that you make to a Performance, as well as copy the current Performance into any Performance memory. The P-150 can store 24 Performances. These 12 buttons each have multiple functions, depending on the current mode. In Voice Play mode you can use them to select any of the 12 preset AWM instrument voices you want to play; the voice names are printed in red above the buttons. In Performance Play mode you can use them to select any of the 24 Performances (12 Performances per bank); the Performance numbers are printed above the buttons. In Edit mode, you can use them to select the Edit functions; the Edit function names are printed in green below the buttons. 2 [EDIT] button This button lets you enter Edit mode and access the various Edit functions. After pressing it once, the LED above the [EDIT] button will begin blinking, as will the light above the currently selected [EDIT SELECT] button % . Pressing it again will return you to the previous Play mode. 3 [PERF. A, B] buttons These buttons let you enter Performance Play mode and select any of the 24 Performances. The P-150 is set at the factory with 24 Preset Performances, but you can overwrite them and store User Performances which you create yourself. The [PERF. A] and [PERF. B] banks hold 12 Performances each, and a lit LED above one of the buttons indicates the currently active bank. 4 [VOICE] button This button lets you enter Voice Play mode by pressing [VOICE] and then pressing a [VOICE SELECT] button % . A lit LED above the [VOICE] button indicates you’re in Voice Play mode. 6 [REVERB] button This button lets you select either a Room, Stage or Hall reverb effect, or no reverb effect, to apply to the currently selected voice. Each voice has a default reverb setting preprogrammed at the factory which you can change. 7 [MODULATION] button This button lets you select either a Chorus, Symphonic or Tremolo modulation effect, or no modulation effect, to apply to the currently selected voice. Each voice has a default modulation setting preprogrammed at the factory which you can change. 8 [EQUALIZER] sliders These sliders let you graphically adjust the level of the sound output of the P-150 in three bands: High, Middle and Low. In Dual and Split modes, the changes you make will affect both voices. 8 1 2 3 INPUT SPEAKER ON OFF R L/MONO 4 5 OUTPUT R L/MONO 6 THRU SUSTAIN SOSTENUTO SOFT MIDI OUT IN FOOT CONTROLLER 1 [SPEAKER] switch 5 [FOOT CONTROLLER] jack This switch lets you turn off the P-150’s internal speakers. It does not affect the output from the [OUTPUT] jacks or the [PHONES] jack. This jack lets you connect a foot controller (Yamaha FC7, available separately) for use as an auxiliary controller. The [FC] foot controller can be assigned to control a variety of functions, including reverb depth or modulation speed, which lets you change these parameters by foot as you play. 2 [INPUT] jacks These jacks let you input line-level signals from another electronic instrument, such as a rhythm programmer, external tone generator, or synthesizer, and monitor it through the P150’s internal speakers. Use the [L/MONO] jack when connecting only a single line. 6 [MIDI] terminals These terminals allow the P-150 to communicate with other MIDI devices, using standard MIDI cables. To control the P-150 using a sequencer or another keyboard, connect the MIDI out jack of the external device to the [MIDI IN] jack of the P-150. To control another device (such as a synthesizer or tone generator) using the P-150, connect the [MIDI OUT] jack of the P-150 to the MIDI in jack of the external device. The [MIDI THRU] jack simply passes the data received at the P-150’s [MIDI IN] jack through unaffected, and is used when connecting three or more MIDI devices in a series. 3 [OUTPUT] jacks These jacks output line-level signals which can be input directly to an external amplifier, mixer or other audio device. Use the [L/MONO] jack if your audio equipment has only one input. 4 Pedal jacks These jacks let you connect up to three foot pedals and use them as sustain, sostenuto and soft pedals. A single FC4 footswitch is included with your P-150. If you wish to attach additional foot pedals, be sure to use only Yamaha models FC4 or FC5. 9 ■ Voice Play and Performance Play Modes The P-150 has two basic Play modes, Voice Play mode and Performance Play mode. Within each mode are various Voice and Performance parameters, or settings that you can change, which make up the sound of the selected voice and the specific operating status of the P-150. P-150 OVERVIEW A group of overall System settings apply to both Voice Play and Performance Play modes, and Edit mode lets you access and edit a wide variety of System and other functions, as shown in the following illustration. SYSTEM VOICE PLAY MODE PERFORMANCE PLAY MODE PERF. A 01~12 VOICE 01~12 PERF. B 01~12 PAFORMANCE PARAMETERS VOICE PARAMETERS EDIT MODE / STORE FUNCTIONS As the above illustration shows, the primary difference between Voice Play mode and Performance Play mode is: ■ In Voice Play mode, a single set of Performance parameter settings apply to any voice (and its specified Voice parameter settings) which you select. ■ In Performance Play mode, a complete set of Performance parameters can be configured specifically for any particular voice (and its specified Voice parameter settings). The P-150 can store up to 24 Performances for instant recall. Normally you will operate in Voice Play mode, Auto Store status (See “About Store Type”, next page)—as you select sounds and make parameter assignments as dictated by your current music session. Then you can store those settings to any of the 24 Performances, which you can then access at any time by the press of a [PERFORMANCE SELECT] button in Performance Play mode. (You can also perform bulk dump operations of Performance data to and from an external MIDI device such as the Yamaha MDF2 MIDI Data Filer.) 10 ABOUT STORE TYPE You can choose the Store Type—Non Auto Store and Auto Store. When Non Auto Store is selected, the store operation is always required (except when modifying System related parameters; see page 13) if you want to save the current settings. When Auto Store is selected, all changes you make will automatically be stored without the need to perform a specific storing procedure. The default setting for a new (or initialized) P-150 is Non Auto Store. (For information about changing the Store Type, see page 45.) Explanations in this Owner’s Manual assume that Auto Store is selected. Therefore, the LCD illustrations herein may be slightly different than the screens on your P-150. In Voice Play mode, each of the P-150’s AWM instrument voices have a set of Voice parameters that are initially set at the factory, but which you can change to suit your needs. These include controller parameters such as pitch bend range and modulation wheel assignment, keyboard sensitivity parameters for internal or MIDI applications, and effect parameters such as reverb type and depth, modulation type and speed, and internal equalizer settings. In Voice Play mode you can access a single set of Performance parameters and in Performance Play mode you can access 24 sets of Performance parameters. Although you can freely change the voices in Performance Play mode, only a single set of Voice parameters is available for each Performance. VOICE PARAMETERS CONTROLLERS • Pitch Bend Range • Modulation Wheel Assign KEYBOARD SENSITIVITY • Internal • MIDI EFFECT • Reverb Type, Speed • Modulation Type, Speed • Equalizer (Internal) Low, Mid, High 11 P-150 OVERVIEW ■ Voice Parameters ■ Performance Parameters In Performance Play mode, the P-150 has 24 sets of Performance parameters which let you configure settings for specific music situations (i.e., for a certain style of music, or a particular song, or for a practice session, or a live set, etc.). This affords you the convenience of being able to recall those settings instantly at the press of a button when in Performance Play mode. Performance parameters include the voice selection (a set of voice parameters), keyboard Single, Dual or Split mode and settings, main and sub voice assignments, User organ combination values, transposition values, keyboard local on or off setting, MIDI transmit and receive channel numbers, plus function assignments for [PS1], [PS2], [CS] and [FC] (foot controller), the Performance name and others. In Voice Play mode you can specify settings for a single set of Performance parameters. Performance Parameters P-150 OVERVIEW VOICE SELECT 12 voices (A set of voice parameters) KEYBOARD MODE Single, Dual, Split VOICE Main, Sub PIANO 1/2 Stereo, Mono BASS Electric, Upright ORGAN COMBINATION • Footage • Response, Attack (Length and Mode) BALANCE –16 ~ 15 DETUNE 0~7 SPLIT POINT • A-1 ~ C7 • MAIN VOICE (Upper, Lower) TRANSPOSE • Enable Switch • Internal Main, Sub • MIDI Main, Sub MIDI CHANNEL • Transmit • Receive LOCAL On, Off CONTROLLERS • PS 1/2 Assign • CS Assign, Range • FC Assign, Range NAME Character select 12 ■ System Settings The P-150’s overall System settings encompass those “global” parameters which are related to the instrument as a whole, and which therefore affect both Voice Play and Performance Play modes. These include master tuning, MIDI transmit enable, MIDI filter transmit and receive parameter settings, MIDI program change table settings, and others. MIDI TRANSMIT ENABLE On, Off SYSTEM • Master Tune • Reverb Bypass • Device Number • MIDI Merge • Performance Enable • Popup Time • Store Type MIDI FILTER • Transmit • Receive PROGRAM CHANGE TABLE • Transmit Number, Bank Select Number P-150 OVERVIEW SYSTEM • Receive Number ■ Editing and Storing Features When the P-150 is in Edit mode, you can access and modify the System and other parameters. A convenient Auto Store feature (which you can disengage) automatically stores the System settings and other parameters as you change them. Within either Voice Play mode or Performance Play mode, you can store the current set of all settings as a User Performance. There is a fine distinction between Voice Play mode store and Performance Play mode store functions. In Voice Play mode, you can overwrite the current set of Voice and Performance parameter settings. In Performance Play mode, you can select a specific destination Performance in which to store the current Performance parameter settings. Therefore, if you select a destination Performance in which to store the current Voice Play mode Performance parameter settings, you are storing it in the Performance Play mode. You will find it most convenient to set up your Performances in Voice Play mode, Auto Store status, since voice selection is so simple, then copy it to one of the 24 Performance memories for instant recall when you need it. By switching into Non Auto Store status, you can be sure that your Performances are protected, and any changes you make in one will not be applied unless you specifically store, or overwrite, it. In Edit mode, the P-150 will prompt you automatically whether or not to overwrite the current changes. You can also dump Performance data to and from external MIDI devices. 13 Descriptions of all parameters and details about how to access and manipulate them are provided in the appropriate sections herein. Also see the Blank Chart on page 65. ■ Setting up the P-150 Although setting up the P-150 for basic play is easy and straightforward, be sure to take heed of the Precautions on page 2 before you begin, then carefully follow the simple steps as outlined below. P-150 SETUP PROCEDURE GETTING STARTED 1. Prepare a suitable location. The P-150 is relatively small for an 88-key instrument, but it is very solidly built and therefore quite heavy. First you’ll want to prepare a suitable location for your P-150. Please do not hesitate to ask someone to help you take it out of the box and carefully place it on an optionally available Yamaha LP-3 keyboard stand or a sturdy table. 2. Plug in the power cord. Next plug the P-150’s power cord into an AC outlet. Do not turn on the [POWER] switch until you have made all connections as described below. 3. Connect the sustain pedal. Next plug the supplied FC4 footswitch into the [SUSTAIN] jack on the rear panel, so you can use it as a sustain pedal. If you have purchased additional FC4 or FC5 footswitches, connect them to the [SOSTENUTO] and [SOFT] jacks. INPUT SPEAKER ON OFF R L/MONO OUTPUT R L/MONO THRU SUSTAIN SOSTENUTO SOFT FOOT CONTROLLER Footswitch FC4 14 MIDI OUT IN Connect external line-level components. If you wish to monitor the P-150’s output using an external line-level mixer or amplifier, connect the input of the external component to the P-150’s [OUTPUT] jacks on the rear panel. (Use both jacks for stereo output; use the [L/MONO] jack for mono output.) Speaker (L) Speaker (R) Amp OUTPUT L/MONO OUTPUT R P-150 If you wish to listen to your P-150 using headphones, connect a pair of stereo headphones to the [PHONES] jack located on the left side of the front panel. The P-150’s internal speakers will automatically be disconnected whenever headphones are plugged into the [PHONES] jack. GETTING STARTED 4. P-150 If you wish to monitor the output of an external line-level device (such as a rhythm programmer, tone generator or synthesizer) via the P-150’s internal speakers, connect the output of the external device to the P-150’s [INPUT] jacks on the rear panel. (Use both jacks for stereo input; use the [L/MONO] jack for mono input.) Tone Generator INPUT L/MONO INPUT R P-150 15 Before connecting the P-150 to any external device, be sure that the power switches of all devices are turned off. 5. Connect MIDI devices. If you wish to connect the P-150 to external MIDI devices such as a rhythm programmer, tone generator or synthesizer, you will need special MIDI cables which plug into the [MIDI] jacks on the rear panel. First, however, you must determine a MIDI system configuration, based on your particular needs or desires. Some examples of MIDI system connections, along with information about MIDI, are provided on page 57. MIDI Cable MIDI OUT MIDI IN Sequencer P-150 6. Attach the music stand. Finally, attach the supplied music stand to the P-150 by carefully inserting it into the groove located along the rear edge of the upper panel. GETTING STARTED ■ Turning on the Power After setting up the P-150, you’re ready to turn on the power and begin enjoying the instrument’s great sounds and many versatile performance and other features. POWER ON/ PITCH OFF MODULATION Switch on the [POWER] button, then gradually raise the [VOLUME] slider until you obtain a comfortable listening level. VOLUME MAX Always turn the P-150 on first, and then turn on external MIDI and audio devices last. However, if a line-level device is plugged into the P-150’s [INPUT] jacks, turn it on before turning on the P-150. When turning off the power of each device, simply reverse the process. MIN 16 ■ Playing the Demo Songs After setting up the P-150 and switching on the power, and before you begin exploring the instrument’s various features, you may want to listen to the three preprogrammed Demo songs which demonstrate the P-150’s exceptional sound and performance capabilities. To do so, follow the steps below. HOW TO PLAY THE DEMO SONGS 1. Enter Demo Play mode. Press the [REVERB] and [MODULATION] buttons simultaneously. The following screen appears. EFFECT REVERB MODULATION ROOM CHORUS STAGE SYMPHONIC HALL TREMOLO DEMO Song Select Immediately after pressing [REVERB] and [MODULATION] (step 1, above), press the [MODULATION] button once or more to select a Demo song. For example, press the button once to select the first Demo song (“Song 1 Play”), or twice to select the second Demo song (“Song 2 Play”), or three times to select the third Demo song (“Song 3 Play”). The song you select will begin playing automatically. EFFECT REVERB MODULATION ROOM CHORUS STAGE SYMPHONIC HALL TREMOLO DEMO Song 1 Play If you press the [MODULATION] button four times, the message “Song all” will appear in the LCD screen, and the P-150 will play all three Demo songs continuously, one after the other. DEMO Song all 17 If you don’t press the [MODULATION] button quickly after having entered Demo Play mode, the P-150 will automatically exit Demo Play mode. GETTING STARTED 2. Select and play a Demo song. 3. Exit Demo Play mode. If you select “Song 1 Play”, “Song 2 Play” or “Song 3 Play” the P-150 will exit the Demo Play mode automatically when the selected song finishes playing. To exit Demo Play mode while a song is playing, simply press the [REVERB] button. EFFECT REVERB MODULATION ROOM CHORUS STAGE SYMPHONIC HALL TREMOLO You cannot enter Demo Play mode (or any other Play mode) when the P150 is in Edit mode. (The LED above the [EDIT] button will blink when the P-150 is in Edit mode.) To exit Edit mode, simply press the [EDIT] button. Also note that you will not be able to play the P-150 or use any of the Edit mode functions while a Demo song is playing. ■ Playing the Voices Selecting and playing the voices of a new P-150 is simple, since by default the instrument starts up for the first time in Voice Play mode with initialized parameter settings, PIANO 1 voice selected. Therefore, all you have to do is press a [VOICE SELECT] button and start playing the keyboard. Take a few minutes and try playing each of the voices and notice the rich quality and dimension of the P-150’s AWM sound, complete with the nuance of natural expression via the keyboard. GETTING STARTED As you play, try out the [PITCH] wheel, which lets you bend notes up or down. Also try out the [MODULATION] wheel, which lets you add varying degrees of vibrato (or other effects) to the voices. While you’re at it, try out the various reverb and modulation effects, by pressing the [REVERB] and [MODULATION] buttons once or more. When you’re ready for more, turn the page, and find out about all the P-150 has in store. 18 You can assign a specific effect to the [MODULATION] wheel in Edit mode (see page 51) which is completely unrelated to the modulation effects available by pressing the [MODULATION] button (see page 23) once or more. Note that when the vibrato effect is assigned to the [MODULATION] wheel, you cannot apply vibrato modulation to the Piano voices 1 ~ 4. Also note that the reverb depth or modulation speed may be set at 0 for certain voices, and therefore produce no noticeable effect. (For information about changing reverb depth, see page 22. For information about changing modulation speed, see page 23.) ENTERING AND EXITING VOICE PLAY MODE 1. Press the [VOICE] button. When you press the [VOICE] button while the P-150 is in Performance Play mode, the LED above the [VOICE] button starts blinking, indicating that Voice Play mode is standing by waiting to be activated. 2. Press a [VOICE SELECT] button. As soon as a [VOICE SELECT] button is pressed, Voice Play Single mode is activated. The LED above the [VOICE] button and the selected [VOICE SELECT] button will light. VOICE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 PIANO 1 PIANO 2 PIANO 3 PIANO 4 E.PIANO 1 E.PIANO 2 E.PIANO 3 V CHANNEL LOCAL CS FC PS N SYSTEM MIDI FILTER PC TABLE From within Single mode you can easily activate Dual mode (see page 26) or Split mode (see page 28). To exit Voice Play mode, simply enter Performance Play mode. For details, see page 38. 19 VOICE PLAY MODE VOICE ■ Single Mode When the P-150 is in Single mode, you can select and play any one of the 12 voices over the full range of the keyboard. You can also apply and adjust reverb and modulation effects, and adjust the graphic equalizer settings. In Single mode, the LED above the currently selected [VOICE SELECT] button lights, and the name of the currently selected Single voice appears in the LCD screen. SELECTING A SINGLE VOICE Press a [VOICE SELECT] button. To select a voice you need only press any of the 12 [VOICE SELECT] buttons. Voices and Polyphony The P-150’s voices are high quality samples of real musical instruments generated by Yamaha’s exclusive AWM (Advanced Wave Memory) tone generation process. All of the voices have 32-note polyphony, which means that a maximum number of 32 notes can be played simultaneously. This is crucial for achieving uncompromising sound and performance when using a sustain pedal, where certain notes must hold over others as you play, until you release the sustain pedal. VOICE PLAY MODE There is an extra dimension to some of the P-150’s voices. Two of the PIANO voices have special stereo settings, which are capable of 16-note polyphonic output. Also, the BASS voice has both ELECTRIC BASS and acoustic UPRIGHT BASS settings. The following table provides an overview of each preset AWM voice. NO. VOICE DESCRIPTION SAMPLE TYPE 1 PIANO 1 Acoustic grand piano, suitable for various types of music, from classical to jazz. Mono / Stereo 32 / 16 2 PIANO 2 Acoustic grand piano, with sophisticated and deeper resonance and body. Mono / Stereo 32 / 16 3 PIANO 3 Bright acoustic grand piano, ideal for rock as well as jazz. Mono 32 4 PIANO 4 Bright electric grand piano, ideal for pop ballads. Mono 32 5 E. PIANO 1 Standard electric piano with a sharp attack sound. Mono 32 6 E. PIANO 2 Conventional, all-purpose electric piano sound. Mono 32 7 E. PIANO 3 Bright and sparkling, DX-type electric piano sound. Mono 32 8 VIBES Full-bodied vibraphones with sharp attack. Mono 16 (2 layered) 9 ORGAN 1 Full-set organ combination sound with editable footage lengths and other parameters. Mono 8 10 11 ORGAN 2 STRINGS Mono Mono 32 32 12 BASS Mono 32 Standard jazz organ sound. Full orchestral string ensemble. Deep Electric Bass with punch, and full-bodied, resonating Upright Bass. 20 POLYPHONY The Organ 1 voice can be edited and reconfigured in Edit mode (see page 50). ■ Stereo/Mono Piano Pressing and holding the [PIANO 1] (or [PIANO 2]) button for a few moments alternately selects the stereo and mono settings. The initial default setting for the PIANO 1 (and PIANO 2) voice is stereo, and polyphony is 16 notes. CHANGING THE PIANO VOICE SETTING Press and hold [PIANO 1] (or [PIANO 2]) for a few moments. After a moment, the MONO screen briefly appears. 1 2 PIANO 1 PIANO 2 or SYSTEM MIDI FILTER Once you have modified certain parameters in Voice Play or Performance Play mode, QE (Quick Edit) will display in the upper right corner to remind you that you have modified the original settings. Parameters include the following: reverb and modulation setting, stereo/mono setting for Piano1 and Piano2, electric/upright setting for Bass, plus Balance, Dual Detune, Split, and Transpose settings. Piano1 16/32 QE mono As you play the keyboard, the output of the PIANO 1 voice will be in mono, and polyphony will be 32 notes. To return the PIANO 1 voice to its stereo setting, simply press and hold [PIANO 1] for a few moments again. The STEREO screen briefly appears. VOICE PLAY MODE Piano1 16/32 QE stereo ■ Electric/Upright Bass Pressing and holding the [BASS] button for a few moments alternately selects the Electric and Upright settings. The initial default setting for the BASS voice is Electric Bass. CHANGING THE BASS VOICE SETTING Press and hold [BASS] for a few moments. After a moment, the UPRIGHT BASS screen briefly appears. 12 BASS INT.EQ Elec./Upright QE Upright Bass 21 As you play the keyboard, you will hear the Upright Bass voice. To change back to the ELECTRIC BASS voice, simply press and hold [BASS] for a few moments again. The ELECTRIC BASS screen briefly appears. Elec./Upright QE Elec.Bass ■ Reverb Effects The P-150’s internal DSP digital signal processor generates three types of realistic reverb effects, or simulated ambient environments, which you can apply to the voices. These include ROOM, which simulates the natural reverberations of sound in a normal-sized room, STAGE, which simulates the natural reverberations of sound in a night club, and HALL, which simulates the natural reverberations of sound in a relatively large concert hall. As you select each voice you will notice that a specific reverb effect is already assigned to it, indicated by a lit LED to the left of the name of the selected reverb type. These are the initial default assignments set at the factory, but you can select any reverb effect you wish for each voice, or even turn the reverb effect off. You can also change reverb depth on the spot. VOICE PLAY MODE SELECTING A REVERB TYPE Press the [REVERB] button once or more. When you press the [REVERB] button repeatedly, the reverb types will be selected in order as follows: ROOM, STAGE, HALL, then OFF. (No lit LED represents Off status.) You can also select the reverb type and depth settings in Edit mode (see page 52). EFFECT REVERB MODULATION ROOM CHORUS STAGE SYMPHONIC HALL TREMOLO Note that each time you select a reverb type, a message will briefly display in the LCD screen, as follows. REVERB DEPTH QE 2 <> This temporary message displays the current depth level for the reverb type that you just selected, between 0 and 7. You can easily change the depth level for the currently selected reverb type. 22 CHANGING REVERB DEPTH 1. Hold the [REVERB] button and move the [DATA ENTRY] slider (or press [–1/NO] or [+1/YES]). As soon as you move the [DATA ENTRY] slider (or press [–1/NO] or [+1/YES]) the REVERB DEPTH screen appears. CS EFFECT REVERB MODULATION ROOM CHORUS STAGE SYMPHONIC HALL TREMOLO + PS1 PS2 -1/NO +1/YES or DATA ENTRY If you move the [DATA ENTRY] slider upward, the depth level increases; if you move the [DATA ENTRY] slider downward, the depth level decreases. A value of 7 will produce the largest number of reverberations, whereas a value of 0 will effectively turn the reverb off. Try different settings and play the keyboard and notice the difference between high and low reverb depth level settings, and the P-150’s wide variety of reverb options. In Voice Play mode, a different reverb type and depth can be selected for each voice. When you play two voices in either Dual or Split mode, the P-150 will apply the main voice reverb type and depth setting to both voices, and ignore any settings which you may have made for the sub voice. For more information about main and sub voices, see page 25. VOICE PLAY MODE 2. Release the [REVERB] button. After a moment, the voice name will reappear in the screen. ■ Modulation Effects The P-150’s internal DSP digital signal processor generates three types of modulation effects which you can apply to the voices. (Note: These modulation effects are unrelated to the vibrato effect which you can apply to voices using the [MODULATION] wheel. For details about the vibrato effect, see page 52.) These include CHORUS, a modulated delay which effectively makes a voice sound like more than one instrument is being played, SYMPHONIC, a more pronounced chorus effect, and TREMOLO, a rotating speaker effect. As you select each voice you will notice that most have a specific modulation effect already assigned to them, indicated by a lit LED to the left of the name of the selected modulation effect type. These are the initial default assignments set at the factory, but you can select any modulation effect you wish for each voice, or even turn the modulation effect off. You can also change modulation speed on the spot. SELECTING A MODULATION TYPE Press the [MODULATION] button once or more. When you press the [MODULATION] button repeatedly, the modulation types will be selected in order as follows: CHORUS, SYMPHONIC, TREMOLO, then OFF. (No lit LED represents Off status.) EFFECT REVERB MODULATION ROOM CHORUS STAGE SYMPHONIC HALL TREMOLO 23 You can also select the modulation type and speed settings in Edit mode (see page 52). Note that each time you select a modulation type, a message will briefly display in the LCD screen, as follows. MOD SPEED QE 3 This temporary message displays the current speed level for the modulation type that you just selected, between 0 and 7. You can easily change the speed level for the currently selected modulation type. CHANGING MODULATION SPEED 1. Hold the [MODULATION] button and move the [DATA ENTRY] slider (or press [–1/NO] or [+1/YES]). As soon as you move the [DATA ENTRY] slider (or press [–1/NO] or [+1/YES]) the MODULATION SPEED screen appears. CS EFFECT REVERB MODULATION ROOM CHORUS STAGE SYMPHONIC HALL TREMOLO + PS1 PS2 -1/NO +1/YES or DATA ENTRY VOICE PLAY MODE If you move the [DATA ENTRY] slider upward, the speed level increases; if you move the [DATA ENTRY] slider downward, the speed level decreases. A value of 7 will produce the largest number of modulations, whereas a value of 0 will effectively turn the modulation off. 2. Release the [MODULATION] button. After a moment, the voice name will reappear in the screen. Try different settings and play the keyboard and notice the difference between high and low modulation speed level settings. 24 A different modulation type and speed can be selected for each voice. When you play two voices in either Dual or Split mode, the P-150 will apply the main voice modulation type and speed setting to both voices, and ignore any settings which you may have made for the sub voice. For more information about main and sub voices, see page 25. ■ Panel Equalizer The P-150’s three-band equalizer works just like a graphic equalizer found on many home stereo amplifiers. The three sliders provide direct access to the P150’s output in LOW, MIDDLE and HIGH frequency ranges, which gives you considerable control over the quality of the sound. An Internal Equalizer accessible in Edit mode lets you adjust the frequency ranges for each voice. For details, see page 52. ADJUSTING THE EQUALIZATION Move an [EQUALIZER] slider up or down. Move either the [LOW], [MIDDLE] or [HIGH] slider upward to increase the level of output for that range, or move it downward to decrease the level of output for that range. EQUALIZER maximum flat (normal) minimum LOW MIDDLE HIGH The graph below shows how the equalizer modifies the sound output of each range. LOW MIDDLE HIGH VOICE PLAY MODE NORMAL ■ Main and Sub Voices The P-150 is capable of generating two different AWM voices at once, either in Dual mode or Split mode. These are divided into main and sub voice areas of the keyboard which can be assigned to either end of the keyboard. In Dual mode, the order that you press the [SELECT] buttons will determine which voice is the main voice and which is the sub voice. Since both voices are sounded simultaneously, the distinction between the main voice and sub voice is not important when you play the keyboard, but you’ll need to keep it in mind when setting the detune relationship and balance levels. (For details about Dual mode, see page 26.) In Split mode, the main and sub voices each are assigned to separate areas of the keyboard, known as the main and sub keyboard areas. The two keyboard areas are separated at a specified key known as the split point. You can determine the split point, assign the main and sub voices to either end of the keyboard, and adjust the volume balance of the two voices in relation to each other. In general, the main keyboard area is normally above the split point; however, there may be cases when you’ll want to play the main voice below the split point. (For details about Split mode, see page 28.) Note that when you play two voices in either Dual or Split mode, the P-150 will apply the main voice reverb type and depth setting and modulation type and speed setting to both voices, and ignore any settings which you may have made for the sub voice. 25 ■ Dual Mode When the P-150 is in Dual mode, you can play two voices at the same time—a main voice and a sub voice—over the full range of the keyboard. For example, you can blend electric piano and strings sounds together to add depth and texture to a melody line. You can adjust the volume balance of the Dual voices in relation to each other, as well as detune the voices in order to enrich the sound by bringing out the individual characteristics of each Dual voice. You can also transpose each Dual voice (for details, see page 35). In Dual mode you cannot select the Organ 1 voice. ENTERING AND EXITING DUAL MODE 1. 2. Main Voice: Press and hold a [VOICE SELECT] button. Sub Voice: While still holding the first button, simply press another [VOICE SELECT] button. The LED above each [VOICE SELECT] button lights, and those two voices will sound when you play the keyboard. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 PIANO 1 PIANO 2 PIANO 3 PIANO 4 E.PIANO 1 E.PIANO 2 E.PIANO 3 VIBES ORGAN1 ORGAN2 STRINGS BASS CHANNEL LOCAL CS FC PS NAME ORGAN COMBINATION PB MW KBD SENS. INT. EQ SYSTEM MIDI FILTER PC TABLE ! " VOICE PLAY MODE The order that you press the buttons will determine which voice is the main voice and which voice is the sub voice. For example, if you press and hold [E. PIANO 3] and then press [STRINGS], the ELECTRIC PIANO 3 voice will be the main voice, and the STRINGS voice will be the sub voice. [ VOICE ] E.P.3 +Strings Main Voice Sub Voice In Dual mode, since both voices are sounded simultaneously, the distinction between the main voice and sub voice is not important when you play the keyboard. However, you will want to keep it in mind when adjusting the voice balance and detune settings, as described below. When you select voices in Dual mode, the P-150 will apply the main voice reverb type and depth setting and modulation type and speed setting to both voices, and ignore any settings which you may have made for the sub voice. Also, [PITCH] and [MODULATION] wheels apply to both voices equally, with the values as set for the main voice. To exit Dual mode, simply press a single [VOICE SELECT] button to return to Single mode, or press [SPLIT] and enter Split mode. 26 In Dual mode, voice polyphony is determined by the voices you select. For example, if you select two 32note polyphonic voices, polyphony will be reduced to 16 notes. If you select a 32-note voice and a 16-note (stereo) voice, polyphony will be reduced to 10 notes. Likewise, if you select two 16-note (stereo) voices, polyphony will be reduced to 8 notes. ADJUSTING THE BALANCE OF THE DUAL VOICES 1. Hold the [BALANCE] button and move the [DATA ENTRY] slider. As you move the [DATA ENTRY] slider, the DUAL BALANCE screen appears. CS SPLIT + BALANCE DATA ENTRY DUAL BALANCE QE 0.. Sub Main Moving the slider upwards increases the level of the main voice while decreasing the level of the sub voice. Conversely, moving the slider downwards increases the level of the sub voice while decreasing the level of the main voice. You can set the balance to any value between -16 and 15. Two indicators to the right of the numeric value display the relative balance of sub and main voices. In this case you cannot use the [–1/NO] and [+1/YES] buttons to change data. 2. Release the [BALANCE] button. After a moment, the Dual voice names will reappear in the screen. If you choose different Dual voices, the balance relationship will remain the same as determined above, until you change the balance setting again. DETUNING THE DUAL VOICES 1. Hold the [DETUNE] button and move the [DATA ENTRY] slider. As you hold the [DETUNE] button, do not press a key on the keyboard until you move the [DATA ENTRY] slider. (Note: If you press a key on the keyboard before moving the [DATA ENTRY] slider, you will change the Transpose setting. For information about the Transpose feature, see page 33.) CS TRANSPOSE + DETUNE DATA ENTRY 27 VOICE PLAY MODE You’ll find it convenient to set the desired balance by holding the [BALANCE] button and moving the [DATA ENTRY] slider with one hand, and then playing the keyboard with the other hand. As you move the [DATA ENTRY] slider, the DUAL DETUNE screen appears. DUAL DETUNE QE 4/\ You can set the detune to any value between 0 (no detuning) and 7 (maximum detuning). Moving the slider upwards increases the detune value. Conversely, moving the slider downwards decreases the detune value. 2. Release the [DETUNE] button. After a moment, the Dual voice names will reappear in the screen. If you select different Dual voices, the detune relationship will remain the same as determined above, until you change the detune setting again. ● Main and Sub Voice Detune Relationship When you detune two voices in Dual mode, the main voice is raised above the keyboard’s standard pitch by a certain amount and the sub voice is lowered below the keyboard’s standard pitch by an equal amount. The result is that the individual characteristics of each Dual voice are emphasized. The amount of pitch adjustment depends on the value you select. At the maximum detune setting, the voices are each detuned by about one-third of a semitone. VOICE PLAY MODE ■ Split Mode When the P-150 is in Split mode, you can play two voices at the same time—one voice on the left side of the keyboard, and another voice on the right side of the keyboard. For example, you can play a strings pad with one hand, while playing a piano melody with the other; or you can play an electric bass line with your left hand, while playing an organ riff with your right hand. The two voices you play in Split mode are referred to as the main and sub voices. These voices are assigned to separate areas of the keyboard, known as the main and sub keyboard areas, which are separated at a specific key known as the split point. You can determine the split point and assign the main and sub voices to either end of the keyboard. You can also adjust the volume balance of the two voices in relation to each other (for details, see page 30.) 28 In this case you cannot use the [–1/NO] and [+1/YES] buttons to change data. ENTERING AND EXITING SPLIT MODE Press the [SPLIT] button. When you press the [SPLIT] button, the LED above it will light, and the keyboard will split into two areas, one playing the main voice you selected in Single or Dual mode, and the other playing the voice which was last selected as the Split mode sub voice. (ELECTRIC BASS is the default sub voice designated at the factory.) SPLIT BALANCE The current split point designation and keyboard area assignments briefly appear in the screen. Current split point SPLIT POINT=C 2 KBD AREA=Sub/Man Left side Right side The first line of the above screen indicates that the current split point area is designated at key C2 (the initial default setting). The second line indicates that the sub voice is assigned to the left side of the split point, while the main voice is assigned to the right side of the split point. VOICE PLAY MODE After a few moments, the names of two voices will appear in the LCD screen. [VOICE] Bass / Piano1 Sub Voice Main Voice The P-150 will now play the two voices using the current split point designation and keyboard area assignments. Split Point (included in main area) Sub Voice (C2) Main Voice To exit Split mode, simply press the [SPLIT] button again. The P-150 will return to Single or Dual mode, depending on which one was active before you entered Split mode, playing the voice you have selected as the main voice. If you enter Split mode directly from Dual mode, and then choose the Organ 1 voice as the main voice, when you press the [SPLIT] button to exit Split mode, the P-150 will automatically switch to Single mode. In Split mode, the [PITCH] and [MODULATION] wheels, as well as the sustain, soft and sostenuto pedals, will only affect the main voice. 29 SELECTING SPLIT VOICES 1. Main Voice: Press a [VOICE SELECT] button. When you press the [SPLIT] button to enter Split mode, the voice you were playing in Single mode (or the main voice you were playing in Dual mode) will be assigned by default to the main keyboard area. To change the main voice, simply press any [VOICE SELECT] button, the same as you would in Single mode. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 PIANO 1 PIANO 2 PIANO 3 PIANO 4 E.PIANO 1 E.PIANO 2 E.PIANO 3 VIBES ORGAN1 ORGAN2 STRINGS BASS CHANNEL LOCAL CS FC PS NAME ORGAN COMBINATION PB MW KBD SENS. INT.EQ SYSTEM MIDI FILTER PC TABLE 2. Sub Voice: Hold the [SPLIT] button and press a [VOICE SELECT] button. Note that you can assign the same voice to both main and sub keyboard areas. This is useful in such cases where you want to use the same voice on each end of the keyboard, but with different Transpose settings (for details, see page 33), or at different volume balance levels. SPLIT BALANCE + VOICE PLAY MODE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 PIANO 1 PIANO 2 PIANO 3 PIANO 4 E.PIANO 1 E.PIANO 2 E.PIANO 3 VIBES ORGAN1 ORGAN2 STRINGS BASS CHANNEL LOCAL CS FC PS NAME ORGAN COMBINATION PB MW KBD SENS. INT.EQ SYSTEM MIDI FILTER PC TABLE You’ll find it convenient that the procedure for selecting voices is separate from that for entering and leaving Split mode, since this lets you switch the sub keyboard area on and off as needed. For example, you can play the main voice in Single Play mode (or Dual voices) across the entire keyboard during a song’s verse and chorus, then switch into Split mode to add the sub voice for an intricate two-part solo, then switch the Split mode off to play remaining verses and choruses. ADJUSTING THE BALANCE OF THE SPLIT VOICES 1. Hold the [BALANCE] button and move the [DATA ENTRY] slider. As you move the [DATA ENTRY] slider, the SPLIT BALANCE screen appears. CS SPLIT + BALANCE SPLIT BALANCE QE ..0 Sub Main 30 Moving the slider upwards increases the level of the main voice while decreasing the level of the sub voice. Conversely, moving the slider downwards increases the level of the sub voice while decreasing the level of the main voice. You can set the balance to any value between -16 and 15. Two indicators to the right of the numeric value display the relative balance of sub and main voices. 2. In this case you cannot use the [–1/NO] and [+1/YES] buttons to change data. Release the [BALANCE] button. After a moment, the Split voice names will reappear in the screen. If you choose different Split voices, the balance relationship will remain the same as determined above, until you change the balance setting again. CHANGING THE SPLIT POINT Hold the [SPLIT] button and press a key on the keyboard. The key that you press will become the new split point. The SPLIT POINT screen appears. SPLIT BALANCE + (G3) SPLIT POINT QE G 3 As long as you hold the [SPLIT] button, the note name of the key that you pressed will blink; pressing another key will change the split point still again, and the name of the new split point will likewise appear in the screen. You can also raise or lower the current split point setting one semitone at a time by holding the [SPLIT] button and pressing the [–1/NO] or [+1/YES] buttons. 31 VOICE PLAY MODE 1. 2. Release the [SPLIT] button. After a moment, the Split voice names will reappear in the screen. The split point will remain where you set it until you change it again, even if you exit and reenter Split mode. As you change the split point you can specify whether the main voice will play above or below the split point. In general, the main keyboard area is normally above the split point; however, there may be cases when you’ll want to play the main voice below the split point. For example, say you’re playing a song where the verses and choruses call for a piano in the bass and strings on top, and an instrumental part calls for a piano solo that sweeps from one end of the keyboard to another. You can do this by selecting the piano as the main voice and assigning it to the lower keyboard area. You will then be able to switch from Split mode for the verses and choruses to Single mode form the solo, then back to split mode again, simply by pressing the [SPLIT] button. CHANGING MAIN AND SUB KEYBOARD AREAS Hold the [SPLIT] button, then press and hold the split point key. 1. 2. Press a second key below or above the split point key. The SPLIT AREA screen appears. VOICE PLAY MODE SPLIT AREA QE Main/Sub As you hold the [SPLIT] button and split point key, pressing a second key below the split point will designate the left area of the keyboard as the main area. Pressing a second key above the split point will again designate the right area of the keyboard as the main area. C3 (Split point key) D3 (Select key) + + Press and hold Press and hold Select upper key Sub Main SPLIT B2 (Select key) C3 (Split point key) BALANCE + + Press and hold Select lower key Main Sub Note that the key that you press to select the split point will always be included in the main keyboard area. Thus, if you select F4 as the split point and then set the main keyboard area below this point, the main voice will play all notes up to and including F4, whereas the sub voice will play all notes from F#4 on. If you set the main keyboard area above this point, however, the sub voice will play all notes up to E4, and the main voice will play all notes from F4 on. 32 When you select voices in Split mode, the P-150 will apply the main voice reverb type and depth setting and modulation type and speed setting to both voices, and ignore any settings which you may have made for the sub voice. (For more information about main and sub voices, see page 25.) ■ Transpose The P-150 has a multi-faceted transpose feature that lets you transpose the pitch at the touch of a button while you play. The P-150 has four independent transpose paths, which let you set transpose values for the internal main voice as well as the sub voice, and which also let you set transpose values for the MIDI main and sub voices which will affect external devices. Transpose is particularly useful in the Dual and Split modes. In the Dual mode, for example, you can play two different voices at the same time, each having a different pitch. The P-150’s default main voice transpose setting is 12, which means the pitch will transpose up one octave when you press the [TRANSPOSE] button. The default sub voice transpose amounts are set to 0 for Dual and Split modes. USING THE TRANSPOSE FEATURE Press the [TRANSPOSE] button to transpose the pitch of the keyboard. The LED above the [TRANSPOSE] button lights and the TRANSPOSE screen with current transpose value appears. TRANSPOSE DETUNE Depending on the current status and mode, the TRANSPOSE screen will be different. For example, if the P-150 is in Split mode and the MIDI transmit switch is enabled, the screen will display internal and MIDI main and sub voice transposition values. Main voice internal transposition Sub voice MIDI transposition Sub voice MIDI transposition Sub voice internal transposition 33 VOICE PLAY MODE 1. As you play in Split mode, the pitch of both voices will transpose according to main and sub voice settings when you press the [TRANSPOSE] button. You can play two-handed duets with different instruments by transposing the sub voice up or down two octaves to match the pitch range of the main voice. If the P-150 is in Dual mode and the MIDI transmit switch is enabled, the TRANSPOSE screen will display internal and MIDI main voice and internal sub voice transposition values. As you play in Dual mode, the pitch of both voices will transpose according to independent main and sub voice settings when you press the [TRANSPOSE] button. Thus, you can create two-note harmonies by lowering the sub voice so that it plays a fifth or an octave below the main voice. If the P-150 is in Single mode and the MIDI transmit switch is enabled, the TRANSPOSE screen will display internal and MIDI main voice transposition values. As you play in Single mode, the pitch of the entire keyboard will transpose according to the main voice setting when you press the [TRANSPOSE] button. (The sub voice is not active in Single mode.) If the MIDI transmit switch is disabled, only the main voice (and sub voice, depending on mode) transposition value will be displayed. 2. Press the [TRANSPOSE] button again to return the keyboard to normal pitch. The LED above the [TRANSPOSE] button goes out and the keyboard returns to normal pitch. VOICE PLAY MODE SETTING THE TRANSPOSE AMOUNT 1. When the transpose function is on, hold the [TRANSPOSE] button and press a key on the keyboard. The key that you press becomes the new transpose amount. The TRANSPOSE screen appears. TRANSPOSE DETUNE + TRANSPOSE MAIN QE +12 34 C3 (middle C) is the normal pitch, or 0 value, so all you need to do is press any key above or below C3 to set the transpose amount. For example, if you want the transpose amount to be one octave below normal keyboard pitch, simply press C2. To return the transpose amount to normal pitch, simply press C3 again. You can also change the transpose amount setting one semitone at a time by holding the [TRANSPOSE] button and pressing the [–1/NO] and [+1/YES] buttons. You can set the transpose amount anywhere within a range of four octaves, from -24 (C1) to 24 (C5). If you try to set the transpose amount by pressing a key below C1 or above C5 on the keyboard, the P-150 will react as though you pressed C1 or C5. When the transpose setting exceeds the legal range (A–1 ~ C7) the P-150 plays and repeats the one octave higher (or lower) range. Also note that MIDI notes will not be transmitted if the data exceeds MIDI note values 0 ~ 127. Release the [TRANSPOSE] button. The P-150 will assume that you want to transpose using this value, and leave the transpose function turned on after you complete the setting. In a similar way, internal sub voice and MIDI transpose signals for the MIDI main and sub voice can be set independently, as explained below. INTERNAL SPLIT SUB VOICE: To set the transpose value for the internal split sub voice, in Split mode, press and hold [TRANSPOSE], then hold [SPLIT], then press a key on the keyboard (or press the [–1/NO] or [+1/YES] buttons). 1 TRANSPOSE DETUNE + + 2 SPLIT BALANCE 3 VOICE PLAY MODE 2. In this case you cannot use the [CS] slider to change the transpose value. (Trying to do so in Dual mode will activate the detune function.) TRANSPOSE SPLIT SUB QE +12 INTERNAL DUAL SUB VOICE: To set the transpose value for the internal dual sub voice, in Dual mode, press and hold [TRANSPOSE], then hold [SPLIT], then press a key on the keyboard (or press the [–1/NO] or [+1/YES] buttons). TRANSPOSE DUAL SUB QE +12 35 MIDI MAIN VOICE: To set the transpose value for the MIDI main voice, press and hold [TRANSPOSE], then hold [MIDI], then press a key on the keyboard (or press the [ –1/NO] or [+1/YES] buttons). 1 TRANSPOSE DETUNE + + 2 MIDI PAGE 3 TRANSPOSE MIDI MAIN QE +12 MIDI SUB VOICE: To set the transpose value for the MIDI sub voice, press and hold [TRANSPOSE], followed by [SPLIT], then [MIDI], then press a key on the keyboard (or press the [–1/NO] or [+1/YES] buttons). 1 TRANSPOSE DETUNE + 2 SPLIT BALANCE + 3 MIDI PAGE + VOICE PLAY MODE TRANSPOSE MIDI SUB 4 QE +12 ■ MIDI Transmit Enable You can enable or disable MIDI transmission by pressing the [MIDI] button. The LED above the [MIDI] button remains lit while this function is enabled. MIDI PAGE It will not block the reception of data from the [MIDI IN] jack. Note that you cannot enable transmission if the [MIDI] button has been turned off. Also note that setting (in Edit mode) the MIDI transmit channel to Off and setting all the MIDI Filters to On will have the same effect as disabling the MIDI transmit switch. The significance in this case is that turning the [MIDI] button off affects all of the Performances, whereas the aforementioned Edit mode settings can be assigned to individual Performances. For details about the P-150’s MIDI capabilities, see page 57. 36 When changing the internal main or sub voice’s transpose value, the MIDI main or sub voice will change accordingly. ■ MIDI Panic Although MIDI is very reliable, it is in fact so sophisticated that it is not without its occasional faults. For example, sometimes a connected tone generator or synthesizer responds to a Note On message, but not a Note Off message, thus causing a note to get stuck, which can be quite frustrating, especially in a live performance setting. Unexpected sustained notes, sudden losses of volume, and “hanging” pitch bends are also common MIDI problems that can happen when using a sequencer with the P-150 and other MIDI instruments. The P-150’s MIDI Panic feature lets you instantly send note off and other messages to all connected MIDI devices. ACTIVATING MIDI PANIC Hold the [MIDI] button, then press the [REVERB] and [MODULATION] buttons at the same time. EFFECT REVERB MIDI + MODULATION ROOM CHORUS STAGE SYMPHONIC HALL TREMOLO VOICE PLAY MODE PAGE MIDI PANIC SEND The MIDI PANIC SEND screen appears briefly when MIDI Panic is activated. When MIDI Panic is activated, the following messages are sent in sequence over all MIDI channels: All Notes Off; All Sounds Off; Channel Pressure off; Sustain Pedal Off; Modulation Off; Pitch Bend (Center); Reset All Controllers. MIDI Panic has no effect during sending/receiving bulk data or while MIDI Merge is on. 37 ENTERING AND EXITING PERFORMANCE PLAY MODE 1. Press the [PERF. A] or [PERF. B] button. If you press the [PERF. A] button, the LED above it will start blinking to indicate that the P-150 is standing by to enter the PERFORMANCE-A bank. Likewise, if you press the [PERF. B] button, the LED above it will start blinking to indicate that the P-150 is standing by to enter the PERFORMANCE-B bank. PERF. A PERF. B 2. PERFORMANCE PLAY MODE Press a [PERFORMANCE SELECT] button. Pressing a [PERFORMANCE SELECT] button activates Performance mode. The LEDs above the [PERFORMANCE SELECT] and [PERF.] buttons light, and the name of the Performance appears in the LCD screen. PERF. A PERF. B VOICE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 PIANO 1 PIANO 2 PIANO 3 PIANO 4 E.PIANO 1 E.PIANO 2 E.PIANO 3 VIBES CHANNEL LOCAL CS FC PS NAME SYSTEM MIDI FILTER PC TABLE PERFORMANCE<A01> Piano 1 To exit Performance Play mode, simply press the [VOICE] button, followed by a [VOICE SELECT] button, which will return you to Voice Play mode. 38 SELECTING A PERFORMANCE Press a [PERFORMANCE SELECT] button. Pressing any of the 12 [PERFORMANCE SELECT] buttons will access a Performance in the currently selected Performance bank. The name of the Performance appears in the LCD screen. The P-150 comes with 24 Preset Performances designed for various musical purposes. Take a moment and try out each one in both A and B banks. For a list of the Preset Performances, see page 64. Just as in Voice Play mode, Performance Play mode lets you select Single voices as well as activate Dual mode and Split mode. ■ Selecting Single Voices Within Performance Play mode you can easily select Single voices in the current Performance. The procedure is slightly different than in Voice Play mode. SELECTING SINGLE VOICES IN PERFORMANCE PLAY MODE Only a single set of Voice parameters is available for each Performance. Therefore, the Voice parameters set for one voice will also be effective when you select other voices. Hold the [EDIT] button, then press a [VOICE SELECT] button. The name of the voice appears in the LCD screen. EDIT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 PIANO 1 PIANO 2 PIANO 3 PIANO 4 E.PIANO 1 E.PIANO 2 E.PIANO 3 VIBES ORGAN1 ORGAN2 STRINGS BASS CHANNEL LOCAL CS FC PS NAME ORGAN COMBINATION PB MW KBD SENS. INT.EQ SYSTEM MIDI FILTER PC TABLE PERFORMANCE<A01> Piano 1 39 PERFORMANCE PLAY MODE + In Peformance Play mode, a lit LED above a voice button does not indicate the selected voice(s). It indicates the currently selected performance. ■ Selecting Dual Voices Within Performance Play mode you can easily select Dual voices in the current Performance. The procedure is slightly different than in Voice Play mode. SELECTING DUAL VOICES IN PERFORMANCE PLAY MODE Hold the [EDIT] button, then press two [VOICE SELECT] buttons. This activates Dual mode from within Performance Play mode. The names of the voices appear in the LCD screen. EDIT + 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 PIANO 1 PIANO 2 PIANO 3 PIANO 4 E.PIANO 1 E.PIANO 2 E.PIANO 3 VIBES ORGAN1 ORGAN2 STRINGS BASS CHANNEL LOCAL CS FC PS NAME ORGAN COMBINATION PB MW KBD SENS. INT.EQ SYSTEM MIDI FILTER PC TABLE PERFORMANCE<A01> Piano1 +Strings Note that the order in which you press the [VOICE SELECT] buttons determines the main and sub voices, just as in Voice Play mode. For details, see Dual Mode, page 26. ■ Selecting Split Voices PERFORMANCE PLAY MODE Within Performance Play mode you can easily select Split voices in the current Performance. The procedure is slightly different than in Voice Play mode. SELECTING SPLIT VOICES IN PERFORMANCE PLAY MODE 1. Press the [SPLIT] button. This activates Split mode from within Performance Play mode. The names of the voices appear in the LCD screen. SPLIT BALANCE 40 2. Main Voice: Hold the [EDIT] button, then press a [VOICE SELECT] button. EDIT + 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 PIANO 1 PIANO 2 PIANO 3 PIANO 4 E.PIANO 1 E.PIANO 2 E.PIANO 3 VIBES ORGAN1 ORGAN2 STRINGS BASS CHANNEL LOCAL CS FC PS NAME ORGAN COMBINATION PB MW KBD SENS. INT.EQ SYSTEM Sub Voice: Hold the [SPLIT] button and press a [VOICE SELECT] button. SPLIT BALANCE + 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 PIANO 1 PIANO 2 PIANO 3 PIANO 4 E.PIANO 1 E.PIANO 2 E.PIANO 3 VIBES ORGAN1 ORGAN2 STRINGS BASS CHANNEL LOCAL CS FC PS NAME ORGAN COMBINATION PB MW KBD SENS. INT EQ SYSTEM MIDI FILTER PC TABLE PERFORMANCE<A01> Bass / Piano1 PERFORMANCE PLAY MODE 3. MIDI FILTER PC TABLE 41 PERFORMANCE MENUS ■ Edit Menu Tree 4. CHANNEL Edit mode lets you access and edit functions related to System parameters (1. ~ 3.), Performance parameters (4. ~ 9.) and Voice parameters (10. ~ 12. plus REVERB and MODULATION). Page 1.CHANNEL TRANSMIT * RECEIVE * 5. LOCAL The Edit Menu Tree below outlines the Edit mode functions and pages. (Pages can be selected with the [PAGE] button or by pressing the specific [EDIT SELECT] button continually. Items marked with an asterisk* can be selected using the [1]/[q] buttons.) Page 1.LOCAL 6. CONTINUOUS SLIDER(CS) / FOOT CONTROLLER(FC) Page 1.CS ASSIGN 2.CS RANGE MIN/MAX * 3.FC ASSIGN 4.FC RANGE MIN/MAX * SYSTEM MENUS 7. PANEL SWITCH (PS) 1. SYSTEM Page 1.PANEL SWITCH 1 ASSIGN 2.PANEL SWITCH 2 ASSIGN Page 1.MASTER TUNE 2.REVERB 3.DEVICE NUMBER 4.MIDI MERGE 5.PERFORMANCE ENABLE MIDI CHANNEL * LOCAL * CONTROLLER ASSIGN * 6.POPUP TIME PROGRAM CHANGE * OTHERS * 7.STORE TYPE 8. NAME Page 1.PERFORMANCE NAME CHARACTER SELECT (16 characters) * 9. ORGAN COMBINATION Page 1.FOOTAGE 8 FOOTAGE TYPES * 2.RESPONSE, ATTACK RESPONSE, 3 ATTACK TYPES, ATTACK LENGTH/MODE * 2. MIDI FILTER EDIT MODE Page 1.TRANSMIT FILTER MESSAGE TYPE * ON/OFF * 2.RECEIVE FILTER MESSAGE TYPE * ON/OFF * VOICE MENUS 10. PITCH BEND (PB)/MODULATION WHEEL (MW) Page 1.PB RANGE 2.MW ASSIGN 3. PROGRAM CHANGE TABLE Page 1.PROGRAM CHANGE TRANSMIT VOICE/PERFORMANCE NO. * MSB/LSB * PROGRAM CHANGE NUMBER * 2.PROGRAM CHANGE RECEIVE PROGRAM CHANGE NUMBER * VOICE/PERFORMANCE NO. * 11. KEYBOARD SENSITIVITY Page 1.KEYBOARD SENSITIVITY INTERNAL 2.KEYBOARD SENSITIVITY MIDI 3.KEYBOARD RANGE MIN/MAX * 12. INTERNAL EQUALIZER Page 1.EQ LOW * MID * HIGH * REVERB Page 1.REVERB TYPE TYPE * DEPTH * MODULATION Page 1.MODULATION TYPE TYPE * SPEED * 42 SELECTING AN EDIT FUNCTION Press an [EDIT SELECT] button. The LED above the button you press starts blinking, and the name of the currently active parameter page appears in the LCD screen. The Edit function page numbers appear in the upper right corner of the screen. When Non Auto Store is selected and Edit mode is engaged, the letter S, P or V will appear to the right of the page number to indicate which type of parameters you are editing System, Performance or Voice parameters, respectively. 1 MASTER TUNE 1s 440.0Hz PIANO 1 SYSTEM MASTER TUNE 1 440.0Hz Channel, Local, CS FC and PS settings are basically classified as Performance parameters, though they are treated as System parameters when Sys is selected for MIDI Channel, Local or Controller Assign in the Performance Enable function (System Menu), see page 45. When Sys has been selected, the letter S will appear to the right of the page number, replacing the letter P. LOCAL SELECTING EDIT FUNCTION PAGES Press the [PAGE] button once or more. Each time you press the [PAGE] button a page will appear in the LCD screen. 1s on MIDI PAGE ENTERING AND EXITING EDIT MODE You can also select Edit function pages by pressing the same [EDIT SELECT] button once or more. For example, if you select the System function, you can simply press the [SYSTEM] button as many times as necessary to access the System function page you want. Press the [EDIT] button. The LED above the [EDIT] button starts blinking, as does the LED above the [EDIT SELECT] button which was active the last time you exited Edit mode. The name of the currently active parameter page appears in the LCD screen. PERF. A POPUP TIME 6 PC=off OTHERS= 3 1 PERF. B VOICE PIANO 1 The name of each page, as well as the accessible parameters within it, appears in the LCD screen as you step through the pages. SYSTEM MASTER TUNE 1 440.0Hz EDITING PARAMETERS Note that some pages contain several parameters, which you can access with the cursor buttons. (See asterisk* items on the Edit Menu Tree, page 42.) If necessary, press the [<] or [>] buttons to position the cursor over the desired parameter. Each of the 12 [EDIT SELECT] buttons is dedicated to one or more Edit functions, as indicated by a name printed in green below each button. 1. To exit Edit mode, simply press the [EDIT] button again, which returns you to the previous Play mode. SPLIT TRANSPOSE BALANCE DETUNE The currently selected parameter will blink on and off in the LCD screen. POPUP TIME 6 PC=off OTHERS= 3 43 EDIT MODE EDIT 2. Change the parameter using the [–1/NO] and [+1/YES] buttons, or by moving the [DATA ENTRY] slider up or down. Parameters may consist of numeric values or specific settings which you can select. REVERB 2 active ● ACTIVE When the Active setting is selected, the P-150’s on-board reverb effects will function as normal. If the P-150 is in Auto Store status, the changes you make will be stored automatically in the current location. If the P150 is in Non Auto Store status, when you change a parameter and press the [EDIT] button to exit Edit mode, the STORE? confirmation screen appears. ● BYPASS When the Bypass setting is selected, the P-150’s on-board reverb effects will be disengaged. DEVICE NUMBER STORE? (YES/NO) Voices -›Voices The Device Number function lets you match the MIDI device number with the device number of an external instrument. This is necessary when transmitting and receiving bulk data and parameter change data. In this case you will need to store the current Performance by either overwriting it in its current location, or copy it in another Performance bank and number. DEVICE NUMBER 3 1 Regardless of the Auto Store/Non Auto Store status, the parameter changes made in the System menus (System, MIDI Filter, PC Table) are always stored automatically. (For details about store functions, see page 53.) ● OFF When set to Off, the P-150 will ignore incoming MIDI device number messages. ● 1 ~ 16 When a specific MIDI device number is selected, the P-150 will only receive bulk data on the corresponding MIDI device number. ■ System System parameters which you can select and edit include Master Tune, Reverb Bypass, Device Number, MIDI Merge, Performance Enable, Popup Time, and Store Type. ● ALL When set to All, the P-150 will receive bulk data on any device number. (When set to All, the P-150 will transmit on device number 1.) MASTER TUNE MIDI MERGE The Master Tune function lets you fine-tune the basic pitch of the keyboard. EDIT MODE The MIDI Merge function lets you merge all data received at the [MIDI IN] terminal with the data generated by the P-150, for combined transmission at the [MIDI OUT] terminal. As an electronic instrument, the P-150 is set to optimum tuning at the factory, with a default pitch value of 440.0 Hz at A3. You can, however, fine-tune the P-150’s keyboard upward or downward within a range of about 100 cents. Instruments which receive merged MIDI data from the P-150 can be controlled by the P-150 as well as other devices connected to the P-150’s [MIDI IN] terminal. Note that when performing bulk dump operations, the MIDI MASTER TUNE 1s 440.0Hz MIDI MERGE 4 off ● MASTER TUNE (424.0Hz~440.0~456.3Hz) You can change the master tuning between 424.0Hz and 456.3Hz. Merge function must be turned off. For details, see page 55. ● OFF REVERB When set to Off (default), only internal MIDI data will be transmitted from the P-150’s [MIDI OUT] terminal. The Reverb Bypass function lets you disengage the reverb effect. You will find the Reverb Bypass useful to disengage the P-150’s internal DSP when you want to use an external effector. ● ON When set to On, any MIDI data received at the [MIDI IN] terminal will be transmitted as is from the [MIDI OUT] terminal together with data transmitted by the P-150. 44 ● OTHERS (1 ~ 5) PERFORMANCE ENABLE You can have all other popup screens display between one and five seconds. (The default setting is 3.) The Performance Enable function lets you switch between System (“Sys”) settings and Performance (“Perf”) settings for MIDI channel assignments, local on/off status and controller assignments. This function lets you apply the System settings designated in Voice Play mode to all of the Performances. POPUP TIME 6 PC=off OTHERS= 3 ● PERFORMANCE MIDI CHANNEL (Perf, Sys) When Perf is selected, the MIDI transmit and receive channels designated for the currently selected Performance will be effective. When Sys (default) is selected, the MIDI transmit and receive channels designated for the Voice Play mode will affect the entire system. STORE TYPE The Store Type function lets you designate Auto Store or Non Auto Store status. (For information about storing, see page 53.) PERF.MIDI CH 5 sys/ sys/ sys STORE TYPE 7 auto store ● PERFORMANCE LOCAL (Perf, Sys) When Perf is selected, the Local On/Off setting designated for the currently selected Performance will be effective. When Sys (default) is selected, the Local On/Off setting designated for the Voice Play mode will affect the entire system. ● NON AUTO STORE In Non Auto Store (default) status, only System, MIDI Filter and PC Table parameters you change will automatically be stored. Any other changes in Edit mode will cause the STORE? (YES/NO) screen to display to prompt you for confirmation before exiting the Edit mode. Any other changes made in Voice Play mode and Performance Play mode will be ignored unless you specifically perform the store operation. PERF.LOCAL 5 sys/ sys/ sys ● PERFORMANCE CONTROL (Perf, Sys) ● AUTO STORE When Perf is selected, the controller assignments designated for the currently selected Performance will be effective. When Sys (default) is selected, the controller assignments designated for the Voice Play mode will affect the entire system. In Auto Store status, all settings you change will automatically be stored. PERF.CTRL. 5 sys/ sys/ sys Channel, Local, CS FC and PS settings are basically classified as Performance parameters, though they are treated as System parameters when Sys is selected for MIDI Channel, Local or Controller Assign in the Performance Enable function (System Menu); see left. When Sys has been selected, the letter S will appear to the right of the page number, replacing the letter P. POPUP TIME The Popup Time function lets you set the number of seconds a temporary message displays in the screen. The P-150 has a number of messages which appear in the screen depending on which feature you access. By setting the Popup Time, you can determine how long the message stays in the screen. You can also set the Program Change message screen to temporarily display when you change voices or Performances. ● PC (OFF, 1 ~ 5) You can either turn the Program Change popup screen off or have it display between one and five seconds. (The default setting is Off.) POPUP TIME 6 PC=off OTHERS= 3 45 EDIT MODE When Non Auto Store is selected and Edit mode is engaged, the letter S, P or V will appear to the right of the page number in the upper right hand corner to indicate which type of parameters you are editing System, Performance or Voice parameters, respectively. ■ MIDI Filter ■ Program Change (PC) Table The MIDI Filter function lets you select the various types of MIDI data which will be transmitted or received. (Note: The abbreviation “TX” stands for “Transmit” and the abbreviation “RX” stands for “Receive”.) Position the cursor over the Message type or on/off status using the [1] and [q] buttons. The Program Change Table function lets you assign program change numbers to incoming and outgoing program change messages. PROGRAM CHANGE TRANSMIT The Program Change Transmit function lets you assign program change transmit numbers to each voice or Performance. You can also assign bank numbers (MSB/LSB) as bank select messages. TRANSMIT FILTER The Transmit Filter settings let you determine which types of MIDI messages are transmitted from the P-150. Message type Your P-150 can transmit a program change message each time you press a [SELECT] button in Voice or Performance mode. (You can have the number of the program change message display briefly when you select a voice or Performance. For details, see page 45.) TX FILTER 1 note on/off=off At the factory your P-150 was preset so that each [SELECT] button will send the program change number corresponding to the number above the button in Voice mode (1 ~ 12), followed by subsequent numbers in Performance mode, for A and B banks (13 ~ 36). ● MESSAGE TYPES Message types inculude Note On/Off, Control Change, Program Change, Aftertouch, Pitch Bend, Channel Mode Message, Parameter Change and Bulk and FA/FB/FC. (Select the message types with the [-1/NO] and [+1/YES] buttons.) Therefore, when the P-150 is in Voice mode, an external tone generator connected to the P-150 will receive messages selecting program 1 when you press the [PIANO 1] button, program 2 when you press the [PIANO 2] button, and so on. When the P-150 is in Performance mode and bank A is selected, an external tone generator will receive messages selecting program 13 when you press [PIANO 1]. Likewise, when bank B is selected, program 25 will be selected when you press [PIANO 1]. ● ON, OFF Setting the message type to On status will filter this particular data, and therefore it will not be transmitted via the [MIDI OUT] terminal. Setting the message type to Off status will allow the particular data to be transmitted. The default setting for Parameter Change is set to On; all others are set to Off. When controlling external devices such as a tone generator, Exclusive and Bulk should be set to On. When you record your P-150 Performance to an external sequencer and play it back, Exclusive and Bulk should be set to Off. The settings for which program change number is assigned to which [SELECT] button are grouped in a table known as the program change transmit table, which you can access to assign a program change number (between 1 and 128, or Off) to each of the [SELECT] buttons according to Play mode. RECEIVE FILTER You can also select a bank number combining the MSB (Most Significant Byte) and LSB (Least Significant Byte). This makes it possible to select any program on a MIDI device that has more than 128 programs. The MIDI Receive Filter settings let you determine which types of incoming MIDI messages are received. When set to On, the specific data can be protected. EDIT MODE Message type RX FILTER 1 note on/off=off Select assign ● MESSAGE TYPES PC TX V01=(OFF/OFF) 1 1 ● SELECT ASSIGN (V01~V12, A01~A12, B01~B12) Message types include Note On/Off, Control Change, Program Change, Pitch Bend, Channel Mode Message, Parameter Change and Bulk. (Select the message types with [-1/NO] and [+1/YES] buttons.) These parameters let you access each [SELECT] button, with V01 ~ V12 representing the Voice Play mode [VOICE SELECT] buttons, and A01 ~ A12 representing the Performance Play mode A bank [PERFORMANCE SELECT] buttons, and B01 ~ B12 representing the Performance Play mode B bank [PERFORMANCE SELECT] buttons. As you step through each one, the name will appear in the first line of the screen, and the current assignments will appear in the second line. ● ON, OFF Setting the message type to On status will filter this particular data, and therefore it will not be received at the [MIDI IN] terminal. Setting the message type to Off status will allow the particular data to be received. You can choose a specific Voice button number by holding [VOICE] and pressing the desired [VOICE SELECT] button. You can choose a specific Performance A bank button number by holding [PERF. A] and pressing the desired [PERFORMANCE SELECT] button. You can choose a specific Performance B bank button number by holding [PERF. B] and pressing the desired [PERFORMANCE SELECT] button. 46 Whenever the P-150 receives a program change message, it will check the program change receive table to determine whether a voice or Performance has been assigned to the Received program change number. If so, the main voice will automatically switch to the voice indicated by the program change receive table. (If the P-150 is in Dual mode, this will cause it to shift to Single mode.) If the program change function has been turned off for that number the message will simply be ignored. PC TX BankMSB 1 V01=( 1/ 1) 1 MSB number LSB number ● MSB/LSB (Off, 0 ~ 127) This parameter lets you designate the MSB/LSB bank select number. When set to Off (default), the P-150 will not transmit the bank select number. PC RX Pressing the [-1/NO] button lets you select Off for MSB/LSB and Program Change Number. When Off is selected for MSB, LSB will also switch off, and vice-versa. Program Change number ● PROGRAM CHANGE NUMBER (1~128) This parameter lets you designate a program change receive number. As you step through each one, the SELECT assignment will appear to the right. Bank Select (PC Table) BANK PROGRAM MSB LSB Bank 1 1 ~ 128 1 1 Bank 2 1 ~ 128 1 2 Bank 3 1 ~ 128 1 3 Bank 4 1 ~ 128 1 4 “ “ “ “ “ “ “ “ 2 1=V01 PC RX 2 1=V01 Select Assign ● SELECT ASSIGN (V01~V12, A01~A12, B01~B12, Off) This parameter lets you assign which [SELECT] button to assign to the currently designated Program Change Number. PC TX V01=( 1/ 1) 2 1 You can choose a specific Voice button number by holding [VOICE] and pressing the desired [VOICE SELECT] button. You can choose a specific Performance A bank button number by holding [PERF. A] and pressing the desired [PERFORMANCE SELECT] button. You can choose a specific Performance B bank button number by holding [PERF. B] and pressing the desired [PERFORMANCE SELECT] button. Program Change number ● PROGRAM CHANGE NUMBER (Off, 1 ~ 128) This parameter lets you designate the program change number for the currently accessed [SELECT] button. When set to Off, no program change numbers will be transmitted. Pressing the [-1/NO] button lets you select Off for Program Change Number and Select Assign. The Program Change Receive function lets you assign program change receive numbers to the internal voices and Performances, according to the [SELECT] buttons. ■ Channel The Channel function lets you assign the P-150’s MIDI transmit and receive channel numbers or status. The P-150 can receive a program change message from an external MIDI device, in order to select any of the 12 voices or 24 Performances. When connecting the P-150 to an external MIDI device, such as a multitimbral tone generator or synthesizer, you will need to set the P-150’s transmit channel to the same number as the external device’s receive channel, in order to play the external instrument with the P-150’s keyboard. Likewise, you will need to set the P-150’s receive channel to the same number as an external keyboard’s transmit channel in order to play the P-150’s internal voices from an external keyboard. (For more information, see Using MIDI, page 57.) At the factory your P-150 was preset so that each [SELECT] button will receive the program change number message corresponding to the number above the button in Voice mode (1 ~ 12), followed by subsequent numbers in Performance mode, for A and B banks (13 ~ 36). Therefore, when the P-150 is in Voice mode, when an external controller connected to the P-150 sends a program change number 1 message, the PIANO 1 voice will be selected; if it sends a program change number 2 message, the PIANO 2 voice will be selected, and so on. If it sends a program change number 13 message, Performance A01 will be selected; if it sends a program change number 25 message, Performance B01 will be selected, and so on. CHANNEL TRNS 1 TX= 1 RX= 1 47 EDIT MODE PROGRAM CHANGE RECEIVE ● TRANSMIT CHANNEL (Off, 1 ~ 16) The P-150 can be set to transmit MIDI messages on any one of 16 MIDI channels. When set to Off the P-150 will not transmit MIDI messages. If you select Sys for LOCAL in the Performance Enable function (System menu), the Local On/Off setting you have designated previously for the currently selected Performance may actually be different, since the current setting (System setting) in the Voice Play mode will be active. You can change the System setting, and you can easily find which setting (Sys or Perf) is selected in the Performance Enable function, as the letter P will display to the left of the page number if Perf is selected. ● RECEIVE CHANNEL (Off, 1 ~ 16, All) The P-150 can be set to receive MIDI messages on any one of 16 MIDI channels. When set to Off, all incoming MIDI messages will be ignored. When set to All, MIDI messages can be received on all 16 channels at once. In Dual and Single modes, all channel messages will be transmitted via the channel specified here. In Split mode, the main voice will be transmitted via the channel specified here and the sub voice will be transmitted via the next highest channel number than the main voice. ■ Continuous Slider (CS) / Foot Controller (FC) This function lets you assign a function and range to the [CS] and [FC] assignable continuous controllers, for realtime control during performance of the P-150 and/or an external MIDI device. When you set the transmit channel to Off, the MIDI transmit button will be disabled for the currently selected Performance. If you select Sys for MIDI CHANNEL in the Performance Enable function (System menu), the MIDI transmit/receive channel you have previously set for the currently selected Performance may actually be different, since the current setting (System setting) in the Voice Play mode will be active. You can change the System setting, and you can easily find which setting (Sys or Perf) is selected in the Performance Enable function, as the letter P will display to the left of the page number if Perf is selected. CS ASSIGN 1 main volume:007 Once you assign a function to the [CS], the function will be controlled by the [CS] slider on the panel. Once you assign a function to the [FC], the function will be controlled by the Foot Controller, if it is properly connected to the [FOOT CONTROLLER] jack on the rear panel. The Yamaha FC-7 Foot Controller (continuous type) and FC4/FC5 Footswitch (on/off; discrete type) are optionally available. CHANNEL TRNS %1p TX= 1 RX= 1 For example, you can have the [CS] (or [FC]) control the total volume, main or sub voice volume, or control the reverb depth or modulation speed, or transmit aftertouch messages to tone generators capable of receiving them, or send a particular type of control change message to external MIDI devices. The types of functions which can be assigned, and a brief explanation of each, are shown in the following chart. ■ Local The Local control function lets you disconnect the P-150’s keyboard from its internal tone generator. EDIT MODE It is usually turned on so the internal voices will sound when you play the keyboard. When turned off, the internal tone generator will not respond to the notes you play, but the keyboard will still transmit messages via the [MIDI OUT] terminal, and the internal tone generator will respond to messages received at the [MIDI IN] terminal if the transmit channels or receive channels are appropriately set. This is essential when using the P-150 as a master keyboard controller in an expanded MIDI system. LOCAL 1 on ● LOCAL (On, Off) When set to On, the internal tone generator will respond to notes you play on the P-150’s keyboard. When set to Off, the internal tone generator will not respond to notes you play on the P-150’s keyboard. 48 ● CONTINUOUS SLIDER ASSIGN (see chart) INTERNAL CONTROL For assigning a specific function to the CS. (Default is main volume.) No function assigned Reverb Depth Controls the reverb depth level Mod. Speed Controls the modulation speed level Total Volume Controls the P-150’s overall volume Main Volume Controls the main voice volume Sub Volume Controls the sub voice volume CS ASSIGN 1 main volume:007 ● CONTINUOUS SLIDER RANGE MINIMUM (1~128) / MAXIMUM (1~128) MIDI CONTROL CHANGE MESSAGES Modulation 001 Sends a modulation message Breath Control 002 Sends a breath control message Foot Control 004 Sends a foot control message Porta. Time 005 Sends a portamento time message Data Entry 006 Sends a data entry message Volume 007 Sends a volume message Balance Control 008 Sends a balance control message Panpot 010 Sends a stereo panning message Expression 011 Sends a volume expression message Sustain 064 Sends a sustain message Portamento Sw 065 Sends a portamento switch message Sostenuto 066 Sends a sostenuto message Soft Pedal 067 Sends a soft pedal message Legato Foot 068 Sends a legato foot message Hold 2 069 Sends a hold 2 message (such as “freezing” the operation of a synthesizer’s envelope until the Footswitch is released) Harm. Content 071 Sends a harmonic content message Release Time 072 Sends a release time message Attack Time 073 Sends an attack time message Brightness 074 Sends a brightness message Eff. 1 Depth 091 Sends an effect 1 depth message Eff. 2 Depth 092 Sends an effect 2 depth message Eff. 3 Depth 093 Sends an effect 3 depth message Eff. 4 Depth 094 Sends an effect 4 depth message Eff. 5 Depth 095 Sends an effect 5 depth message Inc. Sw 096 Sends an increment switch message Dec. Sw 097 Sends a decrement switch message NRPN LSB 098 Sends a Non Registered Parameter number LSB bank select message NRPN MSB 099 Sends a Non Registered Parameter number MSB bank select message RPN LSB 100 Sends a Registered Parameter Number LSB bank select message RPN MSB 101 Sends a Registered Parameter Number MSB bank select message Aftertouch The values set here determine the minimum and maximum volume range when you move the [CS] slider. (You cannot set the minimum number to exceed the maximum number.) CS RANGE MIN 2 1#128 ● FOOT CONTROLLER ASSIGN (see chart) For assigning a specific function to the foot controller (FC). (Default is sub volume.) FC ASSIGN 3 total volume ● FOOT CONTROLLER RANGE MINIMUM (1~128) / MAXIMUM (1~128) The values set here determine the minimum and maximum volume range when you press the [FC] controller. (You cannot set the minimum number to exceed the maximum number.) FC RANGE MIN 4 1#128 If you select Sys for CONTROL in the Performance Enable function (System menu), the controller assignment you have previously set for the currently selected Performance may actually be different, since the current setting (System setting) in the Voice Play mode will be active. You can change the System setting, and you can easily find which setting (Sys or Perf) is selected in the Performance Enable function, as the letter P will display to the left of the page number if Perf is selected. The actual range (1 ~ 128) may actually be different depending on the selected function type. If the maximum range of the selected function is less than 128, the available range will be recognized and divided equally into 128 units, and the setting for Min/Max will be executed. Sends a channel aftertouch message 49 EDIT MODE Off ■ Panel Switch (PS) ■ Organ Combination The Panel Switch function lets you assign a function to each of the two Panel Switches for realtime control of an external MIDI sequencer. The Organ Combination function lets you freely edit the Organ 1 voice. This feature gives you considerable control over the timbre and characteristics of the organ sound, so that the range of possibilities are practically limitless. This gives you the flexibility to send Start, Stop or Continue commands to external devices like sequencers and rhythm programmers from the P-150’s panel, i.e., you can start and stop the external device simply by pressing the [PS] switches. With this feature you can literally recreate all of the classic organ sounds, from theatre organ to rock and jazz organ, by adjusting the flute footage levels and the attack settings, just like on conventional organs. To edit the organ sound, you must first select the Organ1 voice before entering Edit mode. Otherwise the CANNOT EDIT message will display when you select the Organ 1 Combination function in Edit mode. (If this happens, simply exit Edit mode, select the Organ 1 voice, and then reenter Edit mode.) ● PS1 ASSIGN (Off, Start, Continue, Stop) When set to Off, the [PS1] will have no specific Play function. When set to Start, Continue or Stop, you can control an external MIDI device by pressing [PS1]. (The default setting for [PS1] is Start.) PS1 ASSIGN 1 start:FA ● FOOTAGE (16’, 8’, 5-1/3’, 4’, 2-2/3’, 2’, 1-1/3’, 1’) There are eight flute footages. The larger footages generate the bass characteristics of the sound, the smaller footages generate the treble characteristics of the sound, and those footages in between generate the mid-range characteristics of the sound. You can adjust the volume level of each flute footage between 0 (no volume) and 7 (maximum volume). ● PS2 ASSIGN Same as for PS1 ASSIGN, above. (The default setting for [PS2] is Stop.) COMBI. PS2 ASSIGN 2 stop:FC 16'=7 1 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 16' If you select Sys for CONTROL in the Performance Enable function (System menu), the Panel Switch assignment you have previously set for the currently selected Performance may actually be different, since the current setting (System setting) in the Voice Play mode will be active. You can change the System setting, and you can easily find which setting (Sys or Perf) is selected in the Performance Enable function, as the letter P will display to the left of the page number if Perf is selected. 8' 5-1/3' 4' 2-2/3' 2' 1-1/3' 1' When only the lowest or highest footage is activated, some notes which exceeds the legal range will not produce any sound. ● RESPONSE, ATTACK (4’, 2-2/3’, 2’, Length, Mode) The left-most parameter, RSP (Response) determines how fast the overall organ combination (footages in page 1) volume reaches maximum level, between a range of 0 (fastest) and 7 ■ Name EDIT MODE COMBI. RESP.=7 2 RSP ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ E The Name function lets you input a name (up to 16 characters in length) for your Performances. Response (slowest). There are three Attack footages which determine the character of the percussive portion of the organ voice. You can adjust the volume level of each Attack footage between 0 (no volume) and 7 (maximum volume). PERF.NAME 1 PERFORMANCE<***> COMBI. 4'=7 2 ATK ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ E ● PERFORMANCE NAME The available characters include upper and lower case Roman letters, numbers 0 ~ 9, a space and various symbols. Position the cursor with the [1]/[q] buttons and choose the desired character with the [-1/NO]/[+1/YES] buttons or the [DATA ENTRY] slider. Attack Footages 4' 2-2/3' 2' COMBI. LENG.=3 2 ATK ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ E ,!,",#,$,%,&,',(,), *,+,,,-,.,/,0~9, :,;,<,=,>,?,@,A~Z, [ , , ], ^ , _, `, a ~ z {,|,},›,‹ (Space) Attack Length 50 ■ Keyboard Sensitivity The right-most parameter, Attack mode, determines which notes in a held cluster of notes are given an attack sound. With the (first) setting, only the first note played will have an attack; all other notes played while the first note is held will have no attack. The Keyboard Sensitivity function lets you control how the volume of the internal voices and connected MIDI instruments respond to your playing. With the [E] (Each) setting, all notes played will have an attack sound. The P-150 lets you designate independent Keyboard Sensitivity settings for the internal tone generator (each voice) and external MIDI devices, as well as the minimum and maximum range of the keyboard volume. COMBI. FIRST 3 ATK ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ E Attack Mode ● KEYBOARD SENSITIVITY INTERNAL (Normal, Soft-1~3, Hard-1~3, Fixed-1~3) This setting determines how the P-150’s keyboard affects the internal voices. There are ten different types of sensitivity settings. (For details, see Velocity Curves, below.) ■ Pitch Bend (PB)/Modulation Wheel (MW) KBD SENS.INT. 1 normal/ This function lets you set the maximum range that the pitch will bend when you use the [PITCH] wheel, as well as determine the type of effect assigned to the [MODULATION] wheel. ● KEYBOARD SENSITIVITY MIDI (Normal, Soft-1~3, Hard-1~3, Fixed-1~3) ● PITCH BEND RANGE (0 ~ 12) You can set the pitch to bend up or down for each voice within one octave, where 0 represents no pitch bend, and 12 represents one octave. (The default for each voice is set to 2.) Each unit is one semitone. 1 2 KBD SENS.MIDI 2 normal/ ● KEYBOARD RANGE (Minimum, Maximum) Moving the [PITCH] wheel to its extreme position while playing the lowest or highest note on the keyboard may exceed the P-150’s legal range (A-1 ~ C7). In such a case, the P-150 will play and repeat the one octave higher or lower range. (This also occurs if the Transpose setting causes the pitch bend to exceed the legal range.) The values set here determine the minimum and maximum volume range of the keyboard, between 1 and 128. (You cannot set the minimum number to exceed the maximum number.) ● MODULATION WHEEL ASSIGN (Off, Reverb KBD RANGE MIN 3 1-128 Depth, Modulation Speed, Vibrato) You can assign one of three effects for each voice to the [MODULATION] wheel, or turn the effect off. MW ASSIGN 2 vibrato When both minimum and maximum are set to 1, no sound will be produced. The vibrato effect is internally set and cannot be modified. Note that trying to apply the vibrato effect to the Piano 1 ~ 4 voices will have no effect. 51 EDIT MODE PB RANGE This setting determines how the P-150’s keyboard affects external MIDI devices, such as a tone generator. There are ten different types of sensitivity settings. (For details, see Velocity Curves, next page.) Velocity Curves ■ Internal Equalizer The P-150 has 10 different types of sensitivity settings for both internal voices and external MIDI instruments, organized in four categories: Normal, Soft-1~3, Hard-1~3, and Fixed-1~3. The Internal Equalizer function lets you adjust the volume of the low, middle and high EQ ranges for the currently selected internal voice. These give you wide and flexible control over how the strength of your playing affects the volume of the internal voices and external MIDI instruments. EQ LOW= 0 1 ❏ NORMAL The P-150’s Normal setting represents the standard linear “velocityto-volume” relationship. ● EQ (Low, Mid, High) You can boost (increase) or cut (decrease) the volume of each range independently, with -16 representing maximum volume cut, 16 representing maximum volume boost, and 0 representing normal volume. (The default for each voice is 0.) On a conventional acoustic instrument such as an acoustic piano, the harder you play, the louder the resulting sound. Generally, this velocity-to-volume relationship is linear, i.e., the sound becomes louder in direct proportion to the strength with which you play, as shown in the following graph. ■ Reverb Volume When the P-150 is in Edit mode, pressing [REVERB] accesses the Reverb Type and Depth settings for the currently selected voice. Max. REVERB TYPE 1 T=room D=4 Reverb type Min. Soft Hard Velocity (playing strength) Depth ● REVERB TYPE (Room, Stage, Hall, Off) You can select one of the three reverb types for the currently selected voice or turn the reverb off. ❏ Soft-1, Soft-2, Soft-3 ● DEPTH (0 ~ 7) The Soft curves are designed to increase the level of the sound with a softer playing style. You can set the reverb depth value between 0 (no effect) and 7 (maximum effect). You can also access the Reverb Type and Depth parameters in Voice Play mode (see page 22). KBD SENS.INT % soft-2e EDIT MODE ■ Modulation ❏ Hard-1, Hard-2, Hard-3 When the P-150 is in Edit mode, pressing [MODULATION] accesses the Modulation Type and Speed settings for the currently selected voice. The Hard curves are designed to increase the level of the sound with a stronger playing style. MOD. TYPE 1 T=tremolo S=2 KBD SENS.INT 1 hard-1h Modulation type Speed ● MODULATION TYPE (Chorus, Symphonic, Tremolo, Off) ❏ Fixed-1, Fixed-2, Fixed-3 The Fixed curves create flat velocity response. The volume of the sound remains the same, no matter how softly or strongly the keys are played. You can select one of the three modulation types for the currently selected voice or turn the modulation off. ● SPEED (0 ~ 7) You can set the modulation speed value between 0 (no effect) and 7 (maximum effect). KBD SENS.INT 1 fixed-1i You can also access the Modulation Type and Speed parameters in Voice Play mode (see page 23). 52 OVERWRITING IN PLAY MODE When Auto Store is designated all parameter changes are stored automatically as you make them. Thus, you can jump back and forth between voices and Voice and Performance modes freely as you play, since all settings will remain as you set them. In this case, necessary storing is literally a matter of copying one Performance to a specific Performance bank and number. 1. In Voice Play mode, press the [STORE] button. The LED above the [STORE] button starts blinking. The following screen appears. STORE When Non Auto Store is designated, in general the changes you make to voices such as reverb and modulation settings will be lost as soon as you change voices, Performances or modes. After making changes in Edit mode, however, the P150 will prompt you and give you the opportunity to overwrite the current edit when you try to leave Edit mode. STORE? (YES/NO) Voices -› Voices 2. By switching into Non Auto Store status, you can be sure that your Performances are protected, and any changes you make in one will not be applied unless you specifically store it. For details about changing the Store status, see page 11. Note that there is a fine distinction between Voice Play mode store and Performance Play mode store functions. In Voice Play mode, you can overwrite the current set of Voice and Performance parameter settings. In Performance Play mode, you can select a specific destination Performance in which to make a duplicate, or copy the current Performance parameter settings. Therefore, if you select a destination Performance in which to store the current Voice Play mode Performance parameter settings, you are storing it in the Performance Play mode. Press [+1/YES] if you want to overwrite the current Voice and Performance parameter settings. (Press [–1/NO] if you want to cancel the store operation and return to the previous mode.) The STORE COMPLETED screen briefly appears to confirm the store operation. ** ** PS1 PS2 -1/NO +1/YES STORE ** COMPLETED ** STORING A PERFORMANCE 1. Regardless of the Auto Store/Non Auto Store status, the parameter changes made in the System, MIDI Filter and PC Table functions are always stored automatically. In either Voice Play mode or Performance Play mode, press the [STORE] button. The LED above the [STORE] button starts blinking. The following screen appears. STORE? (YES/NO) A01 -› A01 53 STORE You will find it most convenient to set up your Performances in Voice Play mode, Auto Store status, since voice selection is so simple, then copy it to one of the 24 Performance memories for instant recall when you need it. 2. To overwrite the current Performance: Press [+1/YES]. (Press [–1/NO] if you want to cancel the store operation and return to the previous mode.) This effectively stores the changes you have made in Edit mode (except for changes made in the overall System settings in the System, MIDI Filter and PC Table functions, which are stored automatically) in the current Performance location, and thus will be retained the next time you enter Performance Play mode. 3. To copy the current Performance into another Performance location: First press [PERF. A] or [PERF. B] to designate the destination Performance bank, then press the desired [PERFORMANCE SELECT] button to designate the Performance number. (You can also designate the destination Performance bank and number by moving the [DATA ENTRY] slider.) PERF. A or PERF. B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 PIANO 1 PIANO 2 PIANO 3 PIANO 4 E.PIANO 1 E.PIANO 2 E.PIANO 3 VIBES ORGAN1 ORGAN2 STRINGS BASS CHANNEL LOCAL CS FC PS NAME ORGAN COMBINATION PB MW KBD SENS. INT.EQ SYSTEM MIDI FILTER PC TABLE STORE? (YES/NO) A01 -› B10 The name of the Performance bank and number appears in the screen. 4. STORE Press [+1/YES] to store the current Performance into the designated Performance bank and number. (Press [–1/NO] if you want to cancel the store operation and return to the previous mode.) The STORE COMPLETED screen briefly appears to confirm the store operation. 54 ■ Bulk Dump 4. The Bulk Dump feature lets you offload parameter settings by sending it to an external MIDI data storage device (such as the Yamaha MDF2 MIDI Data Filer), as well as load it back into the P-150 by receiving it from an external storage device. This gives you the luxury of being able to build a library of P150 settings by storing them on floppy disks. The P-150 can send and receive four types of data in bulk: All data (the P-150’s entire settings); Voice data (Voice settings only); Performance Bank A data (Performance settings for the A bank only); and Performance Bank B data (Performance settings for the B bank only). PERF. A 1 MIDI + PERF. B VOICE PIANO 1 SYSTEM The BULK SEND screen appears while the operation is in progress. BULK SEND Voices Send Bulk Data When the operation is finished, the BULK SEND COMPLETED screen briefly appears. A send bulk data operation must be initiated from the P-150. First, however, make sure the P-150’s MIDI Merge function is off (see page 44). Next, match the device number of the P-150 (see page 44) with the external storage device by assigning the same device number to each. Then, set the external device so that it is standing by waiting for a bulk dump receive message. (For details about how to set the device number and bulk receive standby for the external device, consult the external device’s owner’s manual.) ** ** BULK SEND ** COMPLETED ** To cancel the operation while it is still in progress, press the [–1/NO] button. The BULK SEND EXIT screen briefly appears. ** ** SENDING BULK DATA 1. All Data: Hold the [MIDI] button and press the [PIANO 1 SELECT] button. Voice Data: Hold the [MIDI] button and press the [VOICE] button. BULK SEND ** EXIT ** PERF. A The send bulk data operation cannot be executed when the MIDI Transmit Filter (bulk) is set to On, or the device number is set to Off. 1 MIDI 2. + PERF. B VOICE PIANO 1 SYSTEM Bulk Data Receive Bulk data receive operations must be initiated from the external device. First, however, make sure the P-150’s MIDI Receive Filter (bulk) function is off (see page 46). Next, make sure the device numbers of both devices are set to the same number (see page 44). Performance Bank A Data: Hold the [MIDI] button and press the [PERF. A] button. PERF. A 3. + PERF. B VOICE Once you have made these preliminary preparations, exit the Edit mode and return to the Voice Play or Performance Play mode. Now you’re ready to send data to the P-150 using the external device’s send bulk data operation. The P-150 will automatically accept the data. (For details about setting the device number of the external device and initiating a send bulk data operation, see the external device’s owner’s manual.) PIANO 1 SYSTEM Performance Bank B Data: Hold the [MIDI] button and press the [PERF. B] button. PERF. A 1 MIDI + PERF. B VOICE PIANO 1 SYSTEM 55 APPENDIX 1 MIDI ■ Initialize VOICE SETTINGS: Similarly, you can initialize only the Voice parameter default settings. To do so, first turn the power off, then hold both the [MIDI] and [VOICE] buttons and turn the power back on. The Initialize feature lets you restore the initial factory default settings with a quick and simple operation. Before initializing the settings, make sure to first offload any data that you want to save using the Bulk Dump operation. Otherwise, the Voice and Performance data you have created will be lost permanently. POWER MIDI + VOICE + ON/ OFF INITIALIZING THE DEFAULT SETTINGS 1. 2. Press the [POWER] switch to turn off the power. ** INITIALIZE ** ** Voices ** To initialize all the default settings, hold both the [MIDI] and [EDIT] buttons, then press the [POWER] switch to turn on the power. Factory Default Settings The default settings are shown in Factory Default Settings lists on pages 64, 65 and 66. POWER MIDI + EDIT + ON/ OFF The INITIALIZE ALL screen briefly appears. ** INITIALIZE ** ** All ** PERFORMANCE A (or B) BANK: You can also initialize only the Performance A bank (or B bank) default settings. To do so, first turn the power off, then hold both the [MIDI] and [PERF. A] (or [PERF. B]) buttons and turn the power back on. POWER MIDI + PERF A + ON/ OFF ** INITIALIZE ** ** Perf.A ** APPENDIX 56 ■ Using MIDI System messages also come in a number of varieties. SYSTEM REALTIME messages are used to start, stop and synchronize the sequencing devices in a MIDI system. SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE messages allows for the transmission of data specific to individual devices. This data can be either individual parameter settings, which are transmitted as PARAMETER CHANGE messages, or large blocks of settings, which are usually referred to as BULK DUMPS. When using the P-150’s MIDI functions, you will be mainly concerned with channel voice messages and system exclusive messages. For detailed information about other types of messages the P-150 supports, and how their corresponding functions are implemented, refer to the MIDI Data Format and MIDI Implementation Chart sections. MIDI is an acronym that stands for Musical Instrument Digital Interface, an international standard in use since the 1980s for the purpose of allowing electronic musical instruments— such as synthesizers, tone generators, rhythm programmers, digital keyboards like the P150, and others—to “communicate” with each other by sending and receiving compatible note, controller and other MIDI data. With MIDI, instruments made by different manufacturers can easily be connected to each other using special MIDI cables, and configured to work together in a variety of ways that greatly expands your music composing, performing and even learning capabilities. Following is an outline of the basic concepts about MIDI you’ll need to know to get up and running in short order. Also included are a few examples of MIDI system connections. VOICE Note On/Off, Control Change, Program Change, Pitch Bend, Channel Pressure* MODE All Note Off REALTIME Start*/Stop*/Continue*, Active Sensing COMMON End of Exclusive (F7) EXCLUSIVE System Exclusive (F0) Channel Messages MIDI Channels The MIDI standard provides 16 different channels for the transmission of data between musical instruments. A MIDI KEYBOARD is capable of transmitting data on at least one of these channels. Sequencers and MIDI-equipped computers with music sequencing software (both of which are generally capable of recording, editing and playing back MIDI note, controller and other data) usually transmit data on several channels at once, each channel being designated for a different part of an ensemble performance. For example, a Piano part might be assigned to channel 1, a bass part to channel 2, a horn part to channel 3, and so on. System Messages MIDI devices known as TONE GENERATORS, which are literally synthesizers without a keyboard, can receive MIDI data from keyboards, sequencers, or computers and produce sounds in response. MULTITIMBRAL tone generators can play more than one voice at a time, since they can receive data on more than one channel at a time. *Transmit only. MIDI Messages APPENDIX Data which is transmitted between MIDI devices takes the form of MIDI messages. There are various types of messages. Messages most closely associated with the actual performance of music are called CHANNEL VOICE messages; these include NOTE ON and NOTE OFF messages, which tell a tone generator which notes to play, and when to start and stop playing them. CONTROL CHANGE, PITCH BEND, and AFTERTOUCH or key pressure messages indicate how a keyboard’s control functions are being operated. PROGRAM CHANGE messages tell a tone generator to switch to another voice. Channel voice messages are transmitted on a specific channel which will be received by the tone generator for which they are intended. They are different from SYSTEM messages, which are transmitted on all channels and received by all of the devices in a MIDI system. 57 MIDI Terminals P-150 MIDI Controllers MIDI devices transmit messages to each other via special MIDI cables, which are connected to special MIDI terminals on each device. There are three types of MIDI terminals: IN, OUT, and THRU. The P-150’s MIDI controllers include the two [PS] buttons, the [CS] slider, [PITCH] and [MODULATION] wheels and [FC] Footswitch. You can set the controllers to transmit specific control messages, and assign the external tone generators to respond accordingly. The [PITCH] wheel is dedicated to pitch bend and cannot be assigned otherwise. Not all MIDI devices have three MIDI terminals, but most, including the P-150, do. A device with all three terminals will receive incoming data via its MIDI IN terminal, and output its own data via the MIDI OUT terminal. The MIDI THRU terminal merely echoes, or passes, the data received at the MIDI IN terminal unaffected. This allows a device to be connected in the middle of a series (or “daisy chain”) of instruments, so that the third instrument in the chain will receive the data transmitted by the first instrument rather than that transmitted by the second. Connecting a Sequencer Another simple MIDI setup is to connect the P-150 to a sequencer, as shown in the following example. Sequencer (QY300) Some MIDI instruments, such as the P-150, have a MIDI merge feature which essentially combines the functions of the MIDI OUT and MIDI THRU terminals. For example, when the P-150’s MIDI merge function is turned on, the MIDI OUT terminal will output a combination of the P-150’s own data plus the messages it receives via its MIDI IN terminal. An instrument receiving this merged data will be controlled by both the P-150 and the device connected to the P-150’s MIDI IN terminal. MIDI IN MIDI OUT (For playback) (For recording) MIDI IN MIDI OUT MIDI System Connections One of the simplest MIDI setups is to connect the P-150 to one or more tone generators (such as the Yamaha MU80), as shown in the following example. P150 P150 In this case, the sequencer is used to record the note, program change, controller, etc. data as you play the P-150, and then play it back using the P-150’s internal voices. You can start and stop the sequencer using the P-150’s [PS] buttons (see page 50). Some sequencers have extensive note and other data editing features. The setup shown above will also work for bulk data storage operations (see page 55). Use a sequencer or a special MIDI data storage device (such as the Yamaha MDF2 MIDI Data Filer) to save data from and restore data to the P-150. MIDI OUT MIDI IN MU80(A) MIDI THRU MIDI IN MU80(B) APPENDIX In this case, you can select the voices of both external tone generators directly from the P-150’s panel. In Single or Dual mode, the notes you play on the P-150’s keyboard will play designated voices in the external tone generators, so long as their MIDI receive channels are assigned to the same number as the P-150’s MIDI transmit channel number. In Split mode, the P-150 can transmit on two MIDI channels at the same time (one for the main and one for the sub voice), so you can set one tone generator to respond to only the main voice notes and the other tone generator to respond only to the sub voice notes. You can also take advantage of the P-150’s ability to have independent transpose and keyboard sensitivity settings for its internal tone generator and MIDI transmit note messages. 58 A more sophisticated MIDI setup is required if you want to connect a sequencer, several tone generators and perhaps an effects device. The series, or “daisy chaining” method is shown in the following illustration. P150 P150 MIDI OUT QY300 SPX-990 MIDI IN MU80(A) MIDI THRU MIDI IN MIDI IN 1 MIDI THRU 1 MJC 8 MIDI Patch Bay MIDI IN MIDI IN MIDI OUT MIDI IN MIDI IN 2 MIDI THRU 2 MIDI OUT MIDI IN MIDI THRU 3 MIDI THRU 4 MIDI THRU 5 MIDI THRU 6 MIDI THRU MU80(B) QY300 In this case, the sequencer is used to record the note, program change, controller, etc. data as you play the P-150, and then play it back using the voices in the external tone generators, as well as the P-150’s internal voices. Multitimbral tone generators (such as the Yamaha MU80) can play more than one voice at a time, so you can configure them for layering several voices by assigning the same MIDI channel to more than one voice, or build up a complex ensemble by assigning a different MIDI channel to each voice that makes up a part in your composition. MIDI IN MU80(A) MIDI IN MU80(B) MIDI IN MU80(C) You can send program change messages directly to the external tone generators and the effects device (such as the SPX-990) from the P-150, or record these messages in the sequencer at specific locations in the song, so that voices and effects will change “on cue” during sequencer playback—thus giving you enormous music production power. Note that since you would be recording each music part using a different voice, you would need to set the P150’s keyboard Local feature to Off status (see page 48). MIDI IN SPX-990 Besides eliminating the possibility of MIDI delays, a MIDI patch bay is essential in a larger setup where you frequently need to perform bulk dump and other operations with specific devices, and don’t want to waste time plugging and unplugging cables accordingly. A MIDI patch bay lets you instantly reconfigure the way all MIDI cables are connected for a given application. APPENDIX Be aware that the longer your daisy chain becomes (and also depending on how long your MIDI cables are), the higher the chances that a noticeable “MIDI delay” will occur during play, caused by the time it takes for the MIDI data to reach each device. To avoid such a potentially annoying problem, you can use a MIDI patch bay (such as the Yamaha MJC 8), which is equipped with multiple MIDI IN and MIDI THRU terminals, as shown in the following illustration. 59 ■ Error Messages Occasionally you may encounter certain error messages which appear in the LCD screen. Below is a list with descriptions of each. *** ERROR1 *** REPLACE BATTERY *** ERROR2 *** MIDI RX OVERFLOW *** ERROR3 *** MIDI DATA ERROR *** ERROR4 *** MIDI BULK ERROR *** ERROR5 *** MIDI FILTER ON ! *** ERROR6 *** DEVICE NO. ERROR *** ERROR7 *** MERGE SW ON ! The internal backup battery charge is low and the battery should be replaced. (See page 2.) Too much MIDI data is being received at once. Reception of data is interrupted and cannot be continued. Reduce the amount of data and attempt the operation again. An error occurred during reception of MIDI data. Check all MIDI connections, settings, etc., and attempt the operation again. An error occurred during reception of bulk data. Check all MIDI connections, settings, etc., and attempt the operation again. Certain data cannot be transmitted or received because a MIDI Filter is set to On. Check each MIDI Filter setting in Edit mode. (See page 46.) Bulk data cannot be transmitted or received because the Device Number parameter is either turned off or does not match that of the connected device. (See page 55.) The Send Bulk Data operation cannot be executed when MIDI Merge is on. (See page 44.) APPENDIX 60 ■ Troubleshooting The P-150 is a rather sophisticated electronic instrument with many parameter settings which affect its operation status. As such, occasionally you may find that it does not function as you think it should. If this happens, before rushing the P-150 to the service center, carefully and methodically try to isolate the problem. Most of the time you’ll find the problem to be of an extremely simple nature. • The first thing you should do is check whether the problem is in the P-150 itself, or in one of the connected devices, or in any of the audio or MIDI cables. • Also try changing the voices or Performances on the P-150 and check if the problem persists. If the problem occurs with only one specific voice or Performance, check each of its parameters to see if you can isolate the specific cause. If the problem occurs regardless of which voice or Performance is selected, check the System parameters to see if a particular global setting is the cause. Possible Cause and Solution No sound is output from the P-150 Check that: • The [SPEAKER] switch on the rear panel is turned on. • The [VOLUME] slider is turned up. • The Foot Controller that is assigned to Volume or Expression (011) is pressed down. • The Local On/Off feature is set to On. (See page 48.) • (If the Local On/Off feature is set to Off and you’re using the P-150 with a sequencer), the Transmit Channel is set to the same number as the Receive Channel. (See page 48.) Little or no sound is output Check that the Keyboard Sensitivity setting is appropriate. (See page 51.) Depending on which keys of the Check that in Split mode, the Balance setting is appropriate. (See page 30.) keyboard are played, no sound (or only a very soft sound) is output The pitch of the P-150 is off or out of tune (compared to standard pitch or other instruments) Check that: • The Master Tune parameter is set correctly. (See page 44.) • The Transpose feature is turned off. (See page 33.) • The Detune (Dual mode) is set to 0. (See page 27.) The pitch of the P-150 Check that the modulation settings are turned off, and the [MODULATION] wheel position is not pure set to minimum. The sound is too thin, or too “boomy”, or radically different in timbre than expected Check the Internal EQ as well as the Panel Equalizer settings. Adjust one or the other to flat, Some notes of a chord or sustained passage (See (held with the Footswitch) time cannot be heard or normal settings. (See pages 24, 52.) Also check the [MODULATION] wheel position, or the effect settings, as these can drastically alter the sound. (See pages 22, 23, 51.) You may have played more notes than the maximum polyphony of the P-150. Remember that polyphony is decreased when Dual or Split mode is active, or a stereo Piano is selected. page 21.) The situation may also occur when playing the P-150’s keyboard at the same a sequencer is playing internal voices. No sound is output from the connected MIDI instruments Check that: • All MIDI connections have been properly made. (See pages 58, 59.) • The receive channel of the connected device matches that of the Transmit Channel for the P-150. (See page 47.) • The MIDI Transmit switch is enabled. (See page 36.) • The Volume level settings of connected devices are at appropriate levels. 61 APPENDIX The reverb or modulation effect Check that: cannot be heard • The Reverb is set to Active and not Bypass. (See page 44.) • The Reverb Depth setting or Modulation Speed setting is not 0. (See page 52.) Cannot transmit MIDI messages Check that message types are turned off in the MIDI Filter menu of Edit mode, and that the even though the MIDI Transmit Transmit channel is not set to off in Edit mode. (See page 47.) switch is on The sound of the connected MIDI instruments is too soft (or too loud) Check that the Keyboard Sensitivity settings are appropriate. (See page 51.) Connected MIDI instruments Check that the program change receive (or the equivalent parameter) on the receiving MIDI sound, but do not change instrument has not been turned off. programs when changing voices or Performances on the P-150 Sustain (Footswitch pedal Check that the Footswitch is properly connected to the [SUSTAIN] jack. operation) doesn’t work properly Cannot select the Organ 1 voice The Organ 1 voice is not accessible in Dual mode. Transpose value or split point cannot be changed by using the [DATA ENTRY] slider, or balance and detune be values cannot changed by the [-1/NO] or [+1/YES] buttons You cannot use the [DATA ENTRY] slider to change the transpose value or split point; you must hold the [TRANSPOSE] or [SPLIT] button and use the [-1/NO] or [+1/YES] buttons. Likewise, you cannot use the [-1/NO] or [+1/YES] buttons to change the balance or detune values; you must hold the [BALANCE] or [DETUNE] button and move the [DATA ENTRY] slider. APPENDIX 62 ■ Specifications Keyboard 88-key (A-1 to C7), velocity sensitive, Action Effect II Tone Generator AWM; 32-note maximum polyphony Voices PIANO 1 ~ 2 (STEREO/MONO); PIANO 3 ~ 4; ELECTRIC PIANO 1 ~ 3; VIBES; ORGAN 1 ~ 2; STRINGS; BASS (ELECTRIC/UPRIGHT) Play Modes Voice Play mode; Performance Play mode Performances Performance Bank A (1 ~ 12); Performance Bank B (1 ~ 12) Effects REVERB (ROOM, STAGE, HALL, OFF); MODULATION (CHORUS, SYMPHONIC, TREMOLO, OFF) Panel Equalizer LOW; MIDDLE; HIGH Edit SYSTEM MIDI FILTER PC TABLE MASTER TUNE 424.0Hz ~ 456.3Hz REVERB bypass, active DEVICE NUMBER off; 1 ~ 16; all MIDI MERGE off; on PERFORMANCE ENABLE MIDI CHANNEL (sys; perf); LOCAL (sys; perf); CONTROLLER ASSIGN (sys; perf) POPUP TIME PC (off; 1 ~ 5); OTHERS (1 ~ 5) STORE TYPE auto store; non auto store TRANSMIT FILTER Message Types; on/off RECEIVE FILTER Message Types; on/off PROGRAM CHANGE TRANSMIT VOICE/PERFORMANCE NO.(1 ~ 12); MSB/LSB (off; 0 ~ 127); PROGRAM CHANGE NUMBER (off; 0 ~128) PROGRAM CHANGE RECEIVE VOICE/PERFORMANCE NO. (off; 1 ~ 12); PROGRAM CHANGE NUMBER (1 ~128) CHANNEL TRANSMIT (off; 1 ~ 16); RECEIVE (off; 1 ~ 16; all) LOCAL on; off CS FC CS ASSIGN (functions) CS RANGE MIN (1 ~ 128); MAX (1 ~ 128) FC ASSIGN (functions) FC RANGE MIN (1 ~ 128); MAX (1 ~ 128) PS PS1 ASSIGN (off; start:FA; continue:FB; stop:FC) PS2 ASSIGN (off; start:FA; continue:FB; stop:FC) NAME PERFORMANCE NAME ORGAN COMBINATION FOOTAGE 16’, 8’, 5-1/3’, 4’, 2-2/3’, 2’, 1-1/3’, 1’; (0 ~ 7) RESPONSE (0 ~ 7) ATTACK 4’, 2-2/3’, 2’; (0 ~ 7) LENGTH (0 ~ 7) Mode (First, Each) Controls PB MW PITCH BEND RANGE (0 ~ 12) MODULATION WHEEL ASSIGN (off; reverb depth; mod. speed; vibrato) KBD SENS. KEYBOARD SENSITIVITY INTERNAL normal; soft-1~3; hard-1~3; fixed-1~3 KEYBOARD SENSITIVITY MIDI normal; soft-1~3; hard-1~3; fixed-1~3 KEYBOARD RANGE MIN (1 ~ 128); MAX (1 ~ 128) INT. EQ LOW (-16 ~ 16); MID (-16 ~ 16); HIGH (-16 ~ 16) REVERB TYPE (ROOM, STAGE, HALL, OFF); DEPTH (0 ~ 7) MODULATION TYPE (CHORUS, SYMPHONIC, TREMOLO, OFF); SPEED (0 ~ 7) POWER; VOLUME; CS (DATA ENTRY); PS1 (-1/NO); PS2 (+1/YES); SPLIT (BALANCE, 1); TRANSPOSE (DETUNE, q); MIDI (PAGE); LCD CONTRAST; PITCH WHEEL; MODULATION WHEEL; STORE; EDIT; PERF. A; PERF. B; VOICE; SELECT 1 ~ 12; REVERB, MODULATION; EQUALIZER; SPEAKER ON/OFF LCD screen 16-character x 2-row, backlit Button Lamps SPLIT, TRANSPOSE, MIDI enable, STORE, EDIT, PERF. A, PERF. B, VOICE, 1 ~ 12 buttons, EFFECT x 6 Input Jacks FOOT CONTROLLER, SUSTAIN, SOSTENUTO, SOFT; LINE IN (L/MONO, R; 1/4” phone) Output Jacks LINE OUT (L/MONO, R; unbalanced, 1/4” phone); PHONES MIDI Terminals MIDI IN / OUT / THRU Amplifiers 30 W x 2 Speakers 13 cm (5-1/8”) x 2 Dimensions 1385(W) x 424(D) x 159(H) mm (54-1/2” x 16-3/4” x 6-1/4”) Weight 33.7kg (74 lbs.) Included Accessory FC4 Footswitch Optional Accessories Yamaha FC4, FC5 Footswitches; Yamaha FC7 Foot Controller; Yamaha Keyboard Stand LP-3 Specifications and descriptions in this Owner’s Manual are for information purpose only. Yamaha Corp. reserves the right to change or modify products or specifications at any time without prior notice. Since specifications, equipment or options may not be the same in every locale, please check with you Yamaha dealer. 63 APPENDIX Electrical Characteristics Power Consumption: 70 W; Output Impedance: 600Ω; Input Impedance: 10 kΩ ■ FACTORY DEFAULT SETTINGS SYSTEM MIDI TRANSMIT ENABLE SW SYSTEM on MASTER TUNE 440.0 REVERB active DEVICE NUMBER 1 MIDI MERGE off PERFORMANCE ENABLE POPUP TIME MIDI CHANNEL sys LOCAL ON/OFF sys ASSIGN sys PC SEND off OTHERS 3 STORE TYPE MIDI FILTER TRANSMIT RECEIVE non auto store Note On/Off off Control Change off Program Change off Aftertouch off Pitch Bend Change off Channel Mode Message off Parameter Change on Bulk off FA/FB/FC off Note On/Off off Control Change off Program Change off Pitch Bend Change off Channel Mode Message off Parameter Change on Bulk PROGRAM CHANGE TABLE TX RX off NUMBER Voice 01,..,Perf. A01,..,Perf. B12 = 1,..,13,..,36 BANK LSB Voice 01,..,Perf. A01,..,Perf. B12 = off BANK MSB Voice 01,..,Perf. A01,..,Perf. B12 = off NUMBER 1,..,36 = Voice 01,..,Perf. B12 APPENDIX 64 PRESET VOICE LIST SINGLE DUAL PLAY MODE SPLIT SINGLE VOICE MAIN Piano1 SUB Strings PIANO 1 STEREO/MONO Bass stereo PIANO 2 STEREO/MONO stereo BASS ELECTRIC/UPRIGHT electric ORGAN COMBINATION HOLD ATTACK 16' 6 8' 5 5-1/3' 5 4' 0 2-2/3' 0 2' 0 1-1/3' 0 1' 0 RESPONSE 0 4' 0 2-2/3' 5 2' 0 LENGTH 3 EACH/FIRST Each BALANCE 0 DETUNE 0 0 SPLIT POINT C2 SPLIT MAIN VOICE AREA TRANSPOSE Higher Note Range off ENABLE SWITCH INTERNAL MIDI MAIN +12 SUB 0 MAIN +12 0 SUB MIDI CHANNEL 0 1 TX CHANNEL 1 RX CHANNEL LOCAL on PS1 ASSIGN PS2 ASSIGN off CS ASSIGN main volume : 007 RANGE MODULATION WHEEL ASSIGN KBD SENS. 1 RANGE MAX 128 sub volume (internal) RANGE MIN 1 RANGE MAX 128 Piano 1 Piano 2 Piano 3 Piano 4 E.Piano1 E.Piano2 E.Piano3 VIBES ORGAN 1 ORGAN 2 STRINGS 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 BASS 2 mod.speed mod.speed mod.speed mod.speed mod.speed mod.speed mod.speed vibrato mod.speed mod.speed mod.speed off INTERNAL TYPE normal normal soft-2 soft-1 hard-2 soft-3 hard-1 hard-2 fixed-1 fixed-1 hard-3 normal MIDI TYPE normal normal soft-2 soft-1 hard-2 soft-3 hard-1 hard-2 fixed-1 fixed-1 hard-3 normal RANGE MIN 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 RANGE MAX 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 TYPE room REVERB MODULATION EFFECT RANGE MIN ASSIGN FC CONTROLLERS PITCH BEND off hall stage stage stage room stage hall hall hall room hall DEPTH 1 3 3 2 2 1 3 2 2 4 5 3 TYPE off off off off chorus chorus symphonic tremolo tremolo tremolo off chorus SPEED 2 1 2 3 2 3 3 3 0 0 1 2 0 -3 +5 +2 -9 -7 +7 -7 0 +4 +3 -2 MID 0 0 -3 -5 0 0 -11 +6 0 0 0 0 HIGH +3 0 +10 +3 +5 -3 +6 0 0 +2 +7 0 INTERNAL EQUALIZER LOW 65 APPENDIX CONTROLLERS PRESET PERFORMANCE LIST PERF. A 01 SINGLE SINGLE PLAY MODE VOICE MAIN Piano1 SUB Strings ORGAN COMBINATION HOLD ATTACK stereo stereo electric 16' 6 6 6 6 6 8' 5 5 5 5 5 5-1/3' 5 5 5 5 5 4' 0 0 0 0 0 2-2/3' 0 0 0 0 0 2' 0 0 0 0 0 1-1/3' 0 0 0 0 0 1' 0 0 0 0 0 RESPONSE 0 0 0 0 0 4' 0 0 0 0 0 2-2/3' 5 5 5 5 5 2' 0 0 0 0 0 LENGTH 3 3 3 3 3 Each Each Each Each Each 0 SPLIT MAIN VOICE AREA ENABLE SWITCH MAIN 3 C2 C2 C2 C2 C2 Higher Note Range Higher Note Range Higher Note Range Higher Note Range off off off off +12 +12 +12 0 0 -2 Higher Note Range 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 +12 0 0 1 0 +12 +12 0 SUB 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 on on on on on off ASSIGN off off off off PS2 ASSIGN off off off off off CS ASSIGN main volume : 007 main volume : 007 main volume : 007 main volume : 007 main volume : 007 RANGE MIN 1 1 1 1 1 RANGE MAX 128 128 128 128 128 sub volume (internal) sub volume (internal) sub volume (internal) sub volume (internal) sub volume (internal) RANGE MIN 1 1 1 1 1 RANGE MAX 128 128 128 128 128 Room Acoustic Honky Tonk Pan Piano Chorus Piano Ballad Piano ASSIGN PERFORMANCE NAME APPENDIX PITCH BEND RANGE 2 2 2 2 2 MODULATION WHEEL ASSIGN mod.speed mod.speed mod.speed reverb depth mod.speed INTERNAL TYPE normal hard-2 normal hard-2 hard-2 MIDI TYPE normal hard-2 normal hard-2 hard-2 RANGE MIN 1 1 1 1 1 RANGE MAX 128 128 128 128 128 TYPE stage REVERB MODULATION INTERNAL EQUALIZER 0 +12 PS1 FC EFFECT 0 +12 +12 RX CHANNEL 0 0 off MAIN LOCAL 0 0 0 6 +12 SUB TX CHANNEL 0 0 Bass E.P.1 stereo electric SPLIT POINT KEYBOARD SENSITIVITY stereo stereo 0 CONTROLLERS Piano1 Bass Strings electric 0 CONTROLLERS stereo stereo SPLIT DUAL Piano4 Bass DUAL stereo DETUNE MIDI Strings PERF. A 05 SPLIT SINGLE SINGLE Piano3 Bass DUAL electric BALANCE MIDI CHANNEL Piano2 PERF. A 04 SPLIT SINGLE SINGLE Piano3 Bass DUAL stereo EACH/FIRST INTERNAL PERF. A 03 SPLIT SINGLE electric PIANO 2 STEREO/MONO BASS ELECTRIC/UPRIGHT DUAL DUAL stereo PIANO 1 STEREO/MONO TRANSPOSE PERF. A 02 SPLIT SINGLE DUAL room room stage hall DEPTH 6 2 4 7 3 TYPE off off tremolo chorus off SPEED 3 0 0 7 2 LOW 0 -12 -13 -1 0 MID 0 +16 +7 -16 0 HIGH 0 -12 -12 +5 +7 66 DUAL PERF. A 07 SPLIT DUAL PERF. A 08 SPLIT Bass Bass E.P.2 PERF. A 09 SPLIT E.P.2 SINGLE DUAL PERF. A 10 SPLIT E.P.1 DUAL PERF. A 11 SPLIT Bass Piano1 DUAL PERF. A 12 SPLIT E.P.1 SINGLE DUAL E.Piano2 Bass stereo Strings stereo stereo stereo stereo stereo stereo stereo electric electric electric electric upright electric 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Each Each Each Each Each Each Each 0 0 -4 0 +3 0 -5 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 Bass stereo electric +2 SPLIT SINGLE Bass Bass stereo stereo SINGLE DUAL E.Piano3 E.Piano3 Bass SINGLE DUAL DUAL stereo stereo stereo DUAL E.Piano1 E.Piano1 E.Piano1 SINGLE DUAL DUAL DUAL Piano4 SINGLE 0 -4 2 0 0 0 C2 C2 C2 C2 C2 C2 C2 Higher Note Range Higher Note Range Higher Note Range Higher Note Range Higher Note Range Higher Note Range Higher Note Range off off off off off off off +12 +12 +12 +12 +12 +12 +12 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 +12 0 1 0 +12 0 0 0 1 0 +12 +12 0 0 1 0 +12 +12 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 on on on on on on on off off off off off off off off off off off off off off main volume : 007 main volume : 007 main volume : 007 main volume : 007 main volume : 007 main volume : 007 main volume : 007 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 sub volume (internal) sub volume (internal) sub volume (internal) sub volume (internal) sub volume (internal) sub volume (internal) sub volume (internal) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 Fusion Piano Vintage EP Dynamic EP Ballad EP Bell EP Woody EP Tremolo EP 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 mod.speed mod.speed mod.speed mod.speed mod.speed mod.speed mod.speed normal normal hard-2 hard-1 hard-1 normal normal normal normal hard-2 hard-1 hard-1 normal normal 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 room stage stage hall hall room room 3 2 2 3 4 2 2 chorus tremolo chorus chorus symphonic off tremolo 3 3 4 5 4 0 4 -5 +2 -9 +5 -1 -5 -2 0 +3 +6 -2 +1 0 +2 +1 -8 +6 +6 +6 +5 0 67 0 +12 APPENDIX PERF. A 06 SINGLE PERF. B 01 SINGLE DUAL SINGLE PLAY MODE VOICE MAIN Organ1 SUB Strings ORGAN COMBINATION HOLD ATTACK stereo electric 16' 6 5 7 7 0 8' 6 7 7 5 7 5-1/3' 0 6 7 0 0 4' 2 0 0 0 0 2-2/3' 2 0 0 3 1 2' 0 0 0 5 0 1-1/3' 0 0 7 7 0 1' 0 0 0 7 0 RESPONSE 2 1 1 3 1 4' 0 0 0 0 0 2-2/3' 0 2 0 0 0 2' 0 0 0 0 0 LENGTH 3 1 4 3 5 Each Each Each Each First SPLIT MAIN VOICE AREA ENABLE SWITCH MAIN 0 C2 C2 C2 C2 C2 Higher Note Range Higher Note Range Higher Note Range Higher Note Range Higher Note Range off off off off +12 +12 +12 0 0 0 +12 +12 0 0 0 +12 0 0 0 1 0 0 +12 +12 0 1 RX CHANNEL 0 -2 0 0 off MAIN LOCAL 0 0 +12 SUB TX CHANNEL 0 0 0 SUB 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 on on on on on off ASSIGN off off off off PS2 ASSIGN off off off off off CS ASSIGN main volume : 007 main volume : 007 main volume : 007 main volume : 007 main volume : 007 RANGE MIN 1 1 1 1 1 RANGE MAX 128 128 128 128 128 sub volume (internal) sub volume (internal) sub volume (internal) sub volume (internal) sub volume (internal) RANGE MIN 1 1 1 1 1 RANGE MAX 128 128 128 128 128 Jazz Organ Pop Organ Blues Organ Theater Organ Accomp. Organ ASSIGN PERFORMANCE NAME APPENDIX PITCH BEND RANGE 2 2 2 2 2 MODULATION WHEEL ASSIGN mod.speed mod.speed mod.speed mod.speed mod.speed INTERNAL TYPE normal normal normal normal normal MIDI TYPE normal normal normal normal normal RANGE MIN 1 1 1 1 1 RANGE MAX 128 128 128 128 128 TYPE room stage stage stage stage 2 4 4 7 4 symphonic tremolo symphonic chorus chorus REVERB DEPTH MODULATION INTERNAL EQUALIZER 0 +12 PS1 FC EFFECT stereo stereo 0 Bass Strings electric SPLIT POINT KEYBOARD SENSITIVITY stereo stereo 0 CONTROLLERS stereo SPLIT Organ1 Bass Strings electric 0 CONTROLLERS Organ1 Bass Strings DUAL SINGLE stereo DETUNE MIDI stereo PERF. B 05 SPLIT SINGLE SINGLE Organ1 Bass DUAL electric BALANCE MIDI CHANNEL Strings PERF. B 04 SPLIT SINGLE SINGLE Organ1 Bass DUAL stereo EACH/FIRST INTERNAL PERF. B 03 SPLIT SINGLE electric PIANO 2 STEREO/MONO BASS ELECTRIC/UPRIGHT DUAL SINGLE stereo PIANO 1 STEREO/MONO TRANSPOSE PERF. B 02 SPLIT SINGLE TYPE SPEED 0 0 4 5 3 LOW -5 +1 0 0 0 MID +4 +3 0 0 0 HIGH -4 +2 0 0 +4 68 DUAL PERF. B 07 SPLIT DUAL DUAL PERF. B 08 SPLIT SINGLE Vibes E.P.1 SINGLE stereo PERF. B 09 DUAL SPLIT DUAL Strings Bass SINGLE stereo DUAL PERF. B 10 SPLIT SPLIT Piano1 Bass Strings SINGLE stereo Strings DUAL PERF. B 11 SPLIT SPLIT Piano2 Bass Strings SINGLE stereo Strings DUAL PERF. B 12 SPLIT SPLIT E.Piano1 Bass SINGLE stereo Strings DUAL Organ2 Bass stereo Strings stereo stereo stereo stereo stereo stereo stereo electric electric upright electric upright electric 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Each Each Each Each Each Each Each 0 2 0 0 0 -3 +6 2 0 0 0 0 0 -2 0 0 0 Bass stereo electric -2 SPLIT SPLIT Vibes Bass SINGLE -3 0 0 C2 C2 C2 C2 C2 C2 C2 Higher Note Range Higher Note Range Higher Note Range Higher Note Range Higher Note Range Higher Note Range Higher Note Range off off off off off off off +12 +12 +12 +12 +12 +12 +12 0 0 +12 0 0 1 0 +12 0 0 1 0 +12 0 0 1 0 +12 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 +12 +12 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 on on on on on on on off off off off off off off off off off off off off off main volume : 007 main volume : 007 main volume : 007 main volume : 007 main volume : 007 main volume : 007 main volume : 007 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 sub volume (internal) sub volume (internal) sub volume (internal) sub volume (internal) sub volume (internal) sub volume (internal) sub volume (internal) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 Metal Attack Strings Orchestra Romantic Piano Acoustic Duo Electric Duo Jazz Duo Rock Duo 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 mod.speed mod.speed mod.speed mod.speed mod.speed vibrato vibrato hard-2 hard-2 hard-3 hard-1 hard-2 hard-2 normal hard-2 hard-2 hard-3 hard-1 hard-2 hard-2 normal 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 stage hall hall stage stage hall room 2 7 3 2 1 2 4 off symphonic off off chorus symphonic chorus 2 3 0 0 5 3 4 -1 +3 +3 0 0 -2 +2 -3 0 +5 0 +2 0 0 +5 +2 +1 -3 +4 0 -7 69 0 +12 APPENDIX PERF. B 06 SINGLE ■ Blank Chart SYSTEM PARAMETERS MIDI TRANSMIT ENABLE SW SYSTEM on, off MASTER TUNE 424.0Hz ~ 440.0Hz ~ 456.3Hz REVERB active, bypass DEVICE NUMBER off, 1~16, all MIDI MERGE on, off PERFORMANCE ENABLE POPUP TIME MIDI CHANNEL sys, perf LOCAL ON/OFF sys, perf ASSIGN sys, perf PC SEND off, 1~5 OTHERS 1~5 STORE TYPE MIDI FILTER TRANSMIT RECEIVE auto store, non auto store Note On/Off on, off Control Change on, off Program Change on, off Aftertouch on, off Pitch Bend Change on, off Channel Mode Message on, off Parameter Change on, off Bulk on, off FA/FB/FC on, off Note On/Off on, off Control Change on, off Program Change on, off Pitch Bend Change on, off Channel Mode Message on, off Parameter Change on, off Bulk TX RX RX RX Voice 03 Voice 04 Voice 05 Voice 06 Voice 07 Voice 08 Voice 09 Voice 10 Voice 11 Voice 12 off, 1~128 BANK LSB off, 0~127 BANK MSB off, 0~127 NUMBER off/1 ~128 Perf. A01 Perf. A02 Perf. A03 Perf. A04 Perf. A05 Perf. A06 Perf. A07 Perf. A08 Perf. A09 Perf. A10 Perf. A11 Perf. A12 NUMBER off, 1~128 BANK LSB off, 0~127 BANK MSB off, 0~127 NUMBER off/1 ~128 Perf. B01 Perf. B02 Perf. B03 Perf. B04 Perf. B05 Perf. B06 Perf. B07 Perf. B08 Perf. B09 Perf. B10 Perf. B11 Perf. B12 PROGRAM CHANGE TABLE TX Voice 02 NUMBER PROGRAM CHANGE TABLE TX on, off Voice 01 PROGRAM CHANGE TABLE NUMBER off, 1~128 BANK LSB off, 0~127 BANK MSB off, 0~127 NUMBER off/1 ~128 APPENDIX 70 PERFORMANCE SINGLE DUAL PLAY MODE MAIN (1) Piano 1 ~ (12) Bass SUB (1) Piano 1 ~ (12) Bass PIANO 1 STEREO/MONO stereo, mono PIANO 2 STEREO/MONO stereo, mono BASS ELECTRIC/UPRIGHT ORGAN COMBINATION HOLD ATTACK electric, upright 16' 0~7 8' 0~7 5-1/3' 0~7 4' 0~7 2-2/3' 0~7 2' 0~7 1-1/3' 0~7 1' 0~7 RESPONSE 0~7 4' 0~7 2-2/3' 0~7 2' 0~7 LENGTH 0~7 EACH/FIRST 0~7 BALANCE -16~+15 DETUNE 0~7 SPLIT POINT A-1 ~ C7 SPLIT MAIN VOICE AREA -16~+15 on, off ENABLE SWITCH INTERNAL MIDI MAIN -24~+24 SUB -24~+24 MAIN -24~+24 SUB MIDI CHANNEL -24~+24 TX CHANNEL off, 1~16 RX CHANNEL off, 1~16, ALL LOCAL CONTROLLERS on, off PS1 ASSIGN PS2 ASSIGN off, FA, FB, FC CS ASSIGN off, rev depth, mod speed, main, sub, ....., etc. off, FA, FB, FC RANGE MIN 1~128 RANGE MAX FC 1~128 ASSIGN off, rev depth, mod speed, main, sub, ....., etc. RANGE MIN 1~128 RANGE MAX 1~128 PERFORMANCE NAME KEYBOARD SENSITIVITY A~Z, a~z, 0~9, others PITCH BEND RANGE MODULATION WHEEL ASSIGN INTERNAL TYPE MIDI TYPE APPENDIX CONTROLLERS RANGE MIN RANGE MAX EFFECT PARAMETERS SINGLE, DUAL, SPLIT VOICE TRANSPOSE SPLIT REVERB TYPE DEPTH MODULATION TYPE SPEED INTERNAL EQUALIZER LOW MID HIGH 71 ■ MIDI DATA FORMAT 2.MIDITRANSMISSION/RECEPTION 1. MIDI DATA FLOW 2.1MIDITransmissionCondition ACTIVE SENSING FE KEYBOARD PANIC INTERNAL VELOCITY CURVE MIDI VELOCITY CURVE Split NOTE ON/OFF 9n PITCH BEND En MODULATION Bn (01H) PS 1/2 FA, FB, FC CONTINUOUS SLIDER Bn (00~77H) Dn, (F0) FOOT CONTROLLER Bn (00~78H) Dn, (F0) Tx+1ch Tx Filter KBD OFFSET Min/Max MIDI SW Txch P.C. Tx TABLE PROGRAM CHANGE Cn MIDI TRANSPOSE Device No. BULK DUMP Device No. MERGE SW MERGE SW MIDI SW LOCAL MERGE MIDI IN PARAMETER CHANGE MIDI In Tx FILTER OUT MIDI OUT 2.2 MIDI Reception Conditions Rx FILTER FE ACTIVE SENSING MERGE INTERNAL TRANSPOSE 8n NOTE OFF Rxch 9n NOTE ON/OFF Split Rx+1ch P-150 TG Bn ,01 Modulation ,07 Volume Rxch Rx Filter ,40 Sustain ,42 Sostenuto ,43 Soft Split Rx+1ch IN Rxch P.C. Rx TABLE Cn PROGRAM CHANGE 00H~0BH * (Voice) 0CH~23H * (Performance) Split Rx+1ch Rxch En PITCH BEND Split APPENDIX Rx+1ch Device No. BULK DUMP BULK DUMP REQ. PARAMETER CHANGE * (Voice) : Voice Play Mode (single) only * (Performance) : Performance Play Mode only 72 3.CHANNELMESSAGES 3.2Reception 3.2.1 Note On/Off 3.1Transmission 3.1.1 Note On/Off 1. [9nH]->[kk]->[vv] [9nH]->[kk]->[vv] 9nH : Note on/off status kk : Key note 9nH : Note on/off Status n : Channel No. kk : Key No. Transpose vv n : channel no. Reception vv : 0 (C-2) — 127 (G8) : Velocity : 21 (A-1) -108 (C7) Key on : 1-127 Key off :0 : Velocity Key on : 0-127 Key off :0 2. [8nH]->[kk]->[vv] n : channel no. 8nH : Note off Status kk : Key note * Note range can be extended to 0-127 with MIDI TRANSPOSE Reception vv : 0 (C-2) — 127 (G8) : Velocity Key off 3.1.2 Control Change : 0-127 * Note range can be extended to 0-127 with MIDI TRANSPOSE Control Change No. Controller * The notes lower than 21 (A-1) and higher than 108 (C7) will repeat oneoctave higher and lower, respectively. Value 01 Modulation Wheel 0 - 127 64 Sustain Pedal 0 - 127 66 Sostenuto Pedal 0 - 127 67 Soft Pedal 0 - 127 0 -119 FC 0 - 127 0 -119 CS 0 - 127 3.2.2 Control Change [BnH]->[cc]->[vv] BnH : Control Change Status n 3.1.3ProgramChange ● When you choose a voice in Voice Play mode, a Program Change Number corresponding to each selected button is transmitted. : Channel No. cc : Control No. vv : Value Control Change No. ● In Single mode, the Program Change Number corresponding to the button according to the transmit channel is transmitted via the transmit channel. ● In Dual mode, no sub voice Program Change Number is transmitted even if you select the sub voice. (Corresponding to Parameter Change (Exclusive)) ● In Split mode, a Program Change Number is transmitted from the transmit channel for the main voice and on the next highest channel (Txch+1) for the sub voice according to the selected button. Parameter Value 01 Modulation Depth 0 - 127 07 Main Volume 0 - 127 64 Sustain 0 - 127 66 Sostenuto 0 - 127 67 Soft 0 - 127 3.2.3ProgramChange * In Voice Play mode if a Program Change Number from 1 to 12 is received, the voice changes to one of the following voices from the next Key On message. When Aftertouch is assigned to the CS or FC assignable controller, Channel Pressure Data is transmitted. 3.1.5 Pitch Bend Pitch Bend is transmitted with 7-bit resolution. 3.1.6 Channel Mode Message When you press [Panic] switch (SW), <all sounds off>, <all notes off>, <reset all controllers> will be transmitted. See page 37 for detail. RX Program Change No. Voice 1 Piano 1 2 Piano 2 3 Piano 3 4 Piano 4 5 E. Piano 1 6 E. Piano 2 7 E. Piano 3 8 Vibes 9 Organ 1 10 Organ 2 11 Strings 12 Bass * In Performance Play mode if a Program Change Number from 1 to 12 is received, the mode changes to Voice Play mode. If a Program Change Number from 13 to 36 is received, the mode changes to Performance Play mode and the Performance Number changes accordingly. 73 APPENDIX 3.1.4 Aftertouch 4. SYSTEM REAL TIME MESSAGES RX Program Change No. Voice 13 Perf. A01 14 Perf. A02 When Start, Continue, or Stop is assigned to PS1/2 controller, System Realtime messages are transmitted. 5.SystemExclusiveMessages 35 Perf. B11 36 Perf. B12 5.1ParameterChange 5.1.1SystemSetup * Any Bank Select message is ignored. 11110000 01000011 0001nnnn 00101010 00100000 00000000 00000000 0ppppppp 00000000 0vvvvvvv 11110111 3.2.4Aftertouch Aftertouch is not received. 3.2.5 Pitch Bend Only the MSB of the Pitch Bend is received. F0 43H nnnn=Device Number 2A 20 00 00 ppppppp=N2 00 vvvvvvv=Data Value F7 3.2.6 Channel Mode Channel Mode messages are received. 5.1.2Voice Control Change No. Parameter Value 78 All Sounds Off 00H 79 Reset all Controllers 00H 7B All notes off 00H 11110000 01000011 0001nnnn 00101010 00100010 00000000 00000000 0ppppppp 00000000 0vvvvvvv 11110111 ● Channel Mode messages are received by the Receive channel while Omni Off is selected. ● All Sounds Off — Reception is while Omni Off is selected only. While Omni Off is selected, reception only occurs on the same Receive channel, and Key On sounds are quickly silenced. Different from All Notes Off, a dump is forcibly taken and sound is silenced even when a damper or Sostenuto causes the sound after a Key Off to continue or reduce slowly. 5.1.3KeyboardMode ● All Notes Off — While Omni Off is selected, only those sounds that occur during Key On in the Receive Channel are silenced. Nothing is done while Omni On is selected. 11110000 01000011 0001nnnn 00101010 00100110 00000000 00000000 0ppppppp 00000000 0vvvvvvv 11110111 ● Reset All Controllers — While Omni Off is selected, only the Receive channel is reset to its initial value. Nothing is done while Omni On is selected. At reception, the status of the following items are reset to their initial values: Modulation Depth, Main Volume, Sustain, Soft, Sostenuto, and Pitch Bend Depth. (Reverb Depth remains unchanged.) Modulation Depth: Off Sustain: Off Sostenuto: Off F0 43 nnnn=Device Number 2A 22 00 00 ppppppp=N2 00 vvvvvvv=Data Value F7 Main Volume: Max Soft: Off Pitch Bend Depth (Center) F0 43 nnnn=Device Number 2A 26 00 00 ppppppp=N2 00 vvvvvvv=Data Value F7 5.1.4Controller APPENDIX 11110000 01000011 0001nnnn 00101010 00100111 00000000 00000000 0ppppppp 00000000 0vvvvvvv 11110111 74 F0 43 nnnn=Device Number 2A 27 00 00 ppppppp=N2 00 vvvvvvv=Data Value F7 ● For more information about bulk dump format, see page 77. 5.1.5 MIDI Filter Table 11110000 01000011 0001nnnn 00101010 00101100 00000000 00000000 0ppppppp 0000000i 0vvvvvvv 11110111 ● You can assign the device number in Edit mode, System function; see page 44. F0 43 nnnn=Device Number 2A 2C 00 00 ppppppp=N2 i=Send switch vvvvvvv=Data Value F7 ● When the device number is set to Off, bulk dump send and receive operations cannot be executed. ● When MIDI Merge (Edit mode, System function) is set to On, the P-150 cannot send bulk dump messages. ● When the device numbers of the P-150 and the external device are not matched, the P-150 cannot receive bulk dump messages. ● Bulk dump messages cannot be sent and received at the same time. ● When the MIDI Filter bulk setting (Edit mode, MIDI Filter function) is set to On, bulk dump operations cannot be executed. 5.3 MIDI MERGE 5.1.6 Program Change Transmit Table 11110000 01000011 0001nnnn 00101010 00101110 00000000 0iiiiiii 0ppppppp 0000000i 0vvvvvvv 11110111 The MIDI Merge function enables you to merge data received from the MIDI IN termimal with data generated by the P-150, and transmits this merged data. This function works as follows: F0 43 nnnn=Device Number 2A 2E 00 iiiiiii=N1 ppppppp=N2 i=Send switch vvvvvvv=Data Value2 F7 MIDI IN MERGE ON/OFF SWITCH ON MIDI OUT OFF BULK DUMP 1. Some features, such as Controller, might not operate as expected because channel messages can also be transmitted on the same channel as the MIDI channel that the P-150 uses for transmission. (For example, in the case of Controller, an external device connected to MIDI OUT uses the value determined by the most recently used instrument, P-150 or an external device connected to MIDI IN. The sounds from the P-150's tone generator might sometimes cut off when receiving an All Notes Off message.) 5.1.7 Program Change Receive Table 11110000 01000011 0001nnnn 00101010 00101111 00000000 00000000 0ppppppp 00000000 0vvvvvvv 11110111 F0 43 nnnn=Device Number 2A 2F 00 00 ppppppp=N2 00 vvvvvvv=Data Value F7 2. A received Active Sensing message is never transmitted. 3. When an interrupt of the received Active Sensing is detected, transmission of Active Sensing through MIDI OUT is interrupted after 500msec. 4. When the P-150 receives 32 or more bytes of System Exclusive Messages, the MIDI messages transmitted by the P-150 might cause an interruption. (When System Exclusive Messages from MIDI IN are received, the MIDI messages that the P-150 attempted to transmit are held temporarily; however, if the data exceeds 31 bytes, the hold is released and after an EOX is forcibly transmitted, the P-150 MIDI messages are transmitted. In this case the data bytes being received are not transmitted until reception of the status byte of non-System Realtime Messages, and are discarded.) 5.2 BULK DUMP (SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MESSAGES) The system is capable of sending and receiving the following types of bulk dump messages: 5. When the MIDI Merge function is On, Bulk Dumps cannot be sent from the P-150. 1. System Setup Bulk Dump 6. After the P-150 receives one status byte of the System Exclusive Messages, if the status of other channel messages, etc., are received before an EOX is received, the EOX is transmitted and other messages (for example, channel messages) are separated from the System Exclusive Messages and are transmitted. 2. Voice Bulk Dump 3. Keyboard Mode Bulk Dump 4. MIDI Filter Table Bulk Dump 5. Program Change Transmit Table Bulk Dump * When MIDI Merge is On, the MIDI Panic feature does not work. 6. Program Change Receive Table Bulk Dump With the P-150, pressing the [MIDI]+[REVERB]+[MODULATION] buttons suppresses MIDI transmission as an emergency method to shut down all sound. 1. All Bulk Dump All six types of bulk dumps as listed above will be sent. ● MIDI transmission The following messages are transmitted : 2. Performance Bulk Dump Types 2 and 3, listed above, will be sent, for Performance Play mode Performances A01 ~ A12 or B01 ~ 12. Modulation Depth Off, Sustain Pedal Off, All Sound Off, All Note Off, Reset All Controllers, Pitch Bend Depth (Center) and Channel Pressure Off, for all channels. 3. Voice Bulk Dump Types 2 and 3, listed above, will be sent, for Voice Play mode Voices 1 ~ 12 and Performance parameters. ● MIDI Panic transmission is not possible when the MIDI Merge function is On. ● MIDI Panic transmission is not possible during sending/receiving bulk data. The above six types of bulk dump messages can be received independently. * The MIDI Panic feature is an emergency measure of last resort, so sound sometimes might not stop. 75 APPENDIX 5.4 MIDI Panic The following three types of bulk dumps are sent and received: 6. PARAMETER CHANGE TABLE 6.1SystemSetup F0H, 43H, 1nH, 2AH, 20H, 00H, 00H, N2H, 00H, V2H, F7H n : Device Number N2H : Parameter Number V2H : Parameter Value 2 N2 data name V2 (data range) note 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 0A DEVNUM -64 – +63 (o/b) off/on bypass/active off/on sys/perf sys/perf sys/perf off, 1, ....., 5 1, ...., 5 auto store/ non auto store 1–16, all, off Master Tuning MIDI Tx Enable SW Reverb Bypass SW Merge SW Performance Channel Enable SW Performance Local Enable SW Performance Controller Assign Enable SW Popup Time P.C. Send Popup Time Other Store Type auto store / non auto store Device Number MTUNE MENABSW MREVSW MERGSW PERFCHSW PERFLOSW PERFASSSW POPUPPC POPUPOTHER STORETYPE 6.2Voice F0H, 43H, 1nH, 2AH, 22H, 00H, 00H, N2H, 00H, V2H, F7H n : Device Number N2H : Parameter Number V2H : Parameter Value 2 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 N2 data name V2 (data range) note 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 0–12 0–3 0–9 0–9 0–127 0–127 0–3 0–7 0–3 0–7 -16 – +16 (o/b) -16 – +16 (o/b) -16 – +16 (o/b) PB Range Modulation Wheel Assign Int. KBD Sens.Type MIDI KBD Sens. Type KBD Range Min KBD Range Max Effect Reverb Type Effect Reverb Depth Effect Modulation Type Effect Modulation Speed Internal Equalizer Low Internal Equalizer Mid Internal Equalizer High PBRANGE MODASS INTVELCRV RXVELCRV VELMIN VELMAX REVTYPE REVDPT MODTYPE MODSPD INTEQL INTEQM INTEQH 6.3 Keyboard Mode F0H, 43H, 1nH, 2AH, 26H, 00H, 00H, N2H, 00H, V2H, F7H n : Device Number N2H : Parameter Number V2H : Parameter Value 2 APPENDIX N2 data name V2 (data range) note 0 00 PMODE 0–2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 0D VMAIN VDUAL VSPLIT VP1MONO VP2MONO VBASSEW ORGCMB16 ORGCMB8 ORGCMB513 ORGCMB4 ORGCMB223 ORGCMB2 ORGCMB113 0–11 0–11 0–11 stereo/mono stereo/mono elec./upright 0–7 0–7 0–7 0–7 0–7 0–7 0–7 Play Mode 0: Single/ 1: Dual/ 2: Split Main Voice Number *1 2* Sub Voice Number (Dual) *1 Sub Voice Number (Split) 2* Piano1 stereo/mono Piano2 stereo/mono Bass elec./upright Organ Combination 16' Organ Combination 8' Organ Combination 5+1/3' Organ Combination 4' Organ Combination 2+2/3' Organ Combination 2' Organ Combination 1+1/3' 14 15 16 17 18 0E 0F 10 11 12 ORGCMB1 ORGATK4 ORGATK223 ORGATK2 ORGATKLEN 0–7 0–7 0–7 0–7 0–7 Organ Combination 1' Organ Attack 4' Organ Attack 2+2/3' Organ Attack 2' Organ Attack Length 19 20 21 22 23 24 13 14 15 16 17 18 ORGRESPONSE ORG.EF reserve reserve reserve reserve 0–7 each/first Organ Combination Response Organ Attack Each/First 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 19 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F 20 21 22 23 BAL DUAL BAL SPLIT DETUNE SPOINT SAREA SFTSW SFTMAIN SFTSUB D SFTSUB S SFTMAIN MD SFTSUB MD -16 – +15 (o/b) -16 – +15 (o/b) 0–7 A-1–C7 upper/lower off/on -24 – +24 (o/b) -24 – +24 (o/b) -24 – +24 (o/b) -24 – +24 (o/b) -24 – +24 (o/b) Dual Balance Split Balance Dual Detune Split Point Split Main Voice Area Transpose Switch Main Voice Transpose Sub Voice Transpose (Dual) Sub Voice Transpose (Split) Main Voice MIDI Transpose Sub Voice MIDI Transpose 36 37 38 39 24 25 26 27 LOCALSW TXCH RXCH reserve off/on 0–15, off 0–15, off, all Local on/off Switch TX Channel Rx Channel 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 28 29 2A 2B 2C 2D 2E 2F ASSPS1 ASSPS2 ASSCS ASSCSMIN ASSCSMAX ASSFC ASSFCMIN ASSFCMAX 0–3 0–3 0–126 0–127 0–127 0–126 0–127 0–127 PS1 Assign PS2 Assign CS Assign CS Range Min CS Range Max FC Assign FC Range Min FC Range Max 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 3A 3B 3C 3D 3E 3F PERFNAME1 PERFNAME2 PERFNAME3 PERFNAME4 PERFNAME5 PERFNAME6 PERFNAME7 PERFNAME8 PERFNAME9 PERFNAME10 PERFNAME11 PERFNAME12 PERFNAME13 PERFNAME14 PERFNAME15 PERFNAME16 32–127 32–127 32–127 32–127 32–127 32–127 32–127 32–127 32–127 32–127 32–127 32–127 32–127 32–127 32–127 32–127 Performance Name 1 Performance Name 2 Performance Name 3 Performance Name 4 Performance Name 5 Performance Name 6 Performance Name 7 Performance Name 8 Performance Name 9 Performance Name 10 Performance Name 11 Performance Name 12 Performance Name 13 Performance Name 14 Performance Name 15 Performance Name 16 *1 Not possible for Dual mode with Organ 1 and another voice. *2 Execute transmission only. 6.4Controller F0H, 43H, 1nH, 2AH, 27H, 00H, 00H, N2H, 00H, V2H, F7H n : Device Number N2H : Parameter Number V2H : Parameter Value 2 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 N2 data name V2 (data range) note 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 0–127 0–127 0–127 0–127 0–7 0–7 Total Volume Main Voice Volume Sub Voice Volume Vibrato Speed Control Reverb Depth Control Modulation Speed Control reserve reserve VOL TTL VAL MAIN VUL SUB VIBSPD REVDEP MODSPD * Transmitted and received when allocated to the assignable Controller. 76 7. BULK DUMP 6.5 MIDI Filter 7.1 System Setup & Dump Request F0H, 43H, 1nH, 2AH, 2CH, 00H, 00H, N2H, 00H, 2VH, F7H n : Device Number N2H : Parameter Number V2H : Parameter Value 2 SYSTEM SETUP DUMP REQUEST data 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 N2 data name V2 (data range) note 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 10 off/on off/on off/on off/on off/on off/on off/on off/on off/on off/on off/on off/on Tx MIDI Filter Note on/off Tx MIDI Filter Ctrl Change Tx MIDI Filter Prog. Change Tx MIDI Filter Aftertouch Tx MIDI Filter Pitch Bend Tx MIDI Filter Channel Message Tx MIDI Filter Exclusive Tx MIDI Filter Bulk Tx MIDI Filter FA/FB/FC Rx MIDI Filter Note on/off Rx MIDI Filter Ctrl Change Rx MIDI Filter Prog. Change off/on off/on off/on off/on Rx MIDI Filter Pitch Bend Rx MIDI Filter Channel Message Rx MIDI Filter Exclusive Rx MIDI Filter Bulk TXMFILNOTE TXMFILCTRL TXMFILPC TXMFILAFT TXMFILPB TXMFILCH TXMFILPRM TXMFILBULK TXMFILSYS RXMFILNOTE RXMFILCTRL RXMFILPC reserve RXMFILPB RXMFILCH RXMFILPRM RXMFILBULK 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 ↓ 31 F0H, 43H, 1nH, 2AH, 2EH, 00H, N1H, N2H, V1H, V2H, F7H n : Device Number N1H : Parameter Number N2H : Parameter Number V1H : Parameter Value 1 (= 1 don't send P.C.) V2H : Parameter Value 2 N2 data name V2 (data range) note 00 : : 03 04 : : 17 18 : : 23 0–127 0–127 0–127 0–127 0–127 0–127 0–127 0–127 0–127 0–127 0–127 0–127 Voice 01 : : Voice 12 Perf. A01 : : Perf. A12 Perf. B01 : : Perf. B12 TXPGM1 : : TXPGM12 TXPGM13 : : TXPGM24 TXPGM25 : : TXPGM36 bytes S K 2 4 9 0 S Y 00H data 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 ↓ 29 30 F0H 43H 2NH 7AH S K 2 4 9 0 S Y 00H F7H Supplement: Parameter Change 1. 00H–0AH of system setup 32 MTUNE 6.6 Program Change Transmit Table 0 : : 11 12 : : 23 24 : : 35 F0H 43H 0NH 7AH ↓ 42 DEVNUM 43 44 check_sum F7H N1 data name 00 TX P.C. Data 01 Bank Select MSB 02 Bank Select LSB 6.7 Program Change Receive Table N2 data name 0 1 2 00 01 02 : : : : : : 126 7E 127 7F RXPGM1 RXPGM2 RXPGM3 : : : RXPGM127 RXPGM128 V2 (data range) note Voice 01–Perf. B12, off Voice 01–Perf. B12, off Voice 01–Perf. B12, off : : : Voice 01–Perf. B12, off Voice 01–Perf. B12, off Program Change Number1 Program Change Number 2 Program Change Number 3 : : : Program Change Number 127 Program Change Number 128 APPENDIX F0H, 43H, 1nH, 2AH, 2FH, 00H, 00H, N2H, 00H, V2H, F7H n : Device Number N2H : Parameter Number. V2H : Parameter Value 2 77 7.2Voice VOICE type 1: 00H type 2: Voice Number type2 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 ↓ 29 30 31 VOICE NUMBER 00H 01H 02H 03H 04H 05H 06H 07H 08H 09H 0AH 0BH Voice 01 Voice 02 Voice 03 Voice 04 Voice 05 Voice 06 Voice 07 Voice 08 Voice 09 Voice 10 Voice 11 Voice 12 0CH 0DH 0EH 0FH 10H 11H 12H 13H 14H 15H 16H 17H Perf. A01 Voice Perf. A02 Voice Perf. A03 Voice Perf. A04 Voice Perf. A05 Voice Perf. A06 Voice Perf. A07 Voice Perf. A08 Voice Perf. A09 Voice Perf. A10 Voice Perf. A11 Voice Perf. A12 Voice 18H 19H 1AH 1BH 1CH 1DH Perf. B01 Voice Perf. B02 Voice Perf. B03 Voice Perf. B04 Voice Perf. B05 Voice Perf. B06 Voice 1EH 1FH 20H 21H 22H 23H Perf. B07 Voice Perf. B08 Voice Perf. B09 Voice Perf. B10 Voice Perf. B11 Voice Perf. B12 Voice DUMP REQUEST data F0H 43H 0NH 7AH bytes S K 2 4 9 0 V 0 00H type 1 type 2 Supplement: Parameter Change 2. 00H–12H of Voice APPENDIX 78 32 ↓ 44 PBRANGE 45 46 check_sum F7H INTEQH data 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 ↓ 27 28 29 30 F0H 43H 2NH 7AH S K 2 4 9 0 V 0 00H type 1 type 2 F7H 7.3 Keyboard Mode 7.4 MIDI Filter Table Bulk Dump type 1: 00H type 2: Performance Number P.C. TX TABLE DUMP REQUEST data type2 00H : : 0BH 0CH : : 17H 18H PERFORMANCE NUMBER Perf. A01 : : Perf. A12 Perf. B01 : : Perf. B12 Voices KEYBOARD MODE DUMP REQUEST data 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 ↓ 29 30 31 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 ↓ 31 F0H 43H 0NH 7AH bytes S K 2 4 9 0 K B 00H type 1 type 2 data 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 ↓ 27 28 29 30 F0H 43H 2NH 7AH S K 2 4 9 0 K B F0H 43H ONH 7AH bytes S K 2 4 9 0 M F 00H data 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 ↓ 29 30 F0H 43H 2NH 7AH S K 2 4 9 0 M F 00H F7H Supplement: Parameter Change 4. 00H–10H of MIDI Filter Table 32 ↓ 48 TXMFILNOTE RXMFILBULK 49 50 check_sum F7H 00H type 1 type 2 F7H Supplement: Parameter Change 3. 00H–3FH of Keyboard Mode 32 ↓ 95 PMODE 96 97 check_sum F7H APPENDIX PERFNAME 16 79 7.5 Program Change Transmit Table Bulk Dump 7.6 Program Change Receive Table Bulk Dump type 1: 00H type 2: Voice No. type 2 00H 01H 02H P.C. Tx TABLE VOICE NUMBER 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 ↓ 31 P.C.Data Bank Select MSB Bank Select LSB P.C. Tx TABLE DUMP REQUEST data 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 ↓ 29 30 31 F0H 43H 0NH 7AH bytes S K 2 4 9 0 P T 00H type 1 type 2 data 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 ↓ 27 28 29 30 F0H 43H 2NH 7AH S K 2 4 9 0 P T F0H 43H 0NH 7AH bytes S K 2 4 9 0 P R 00H Supplement: Parameter Change 6. 00H–7FH of Program Change Receive Table 32 RXPGM1 ↓ 159 RXPGM128 00H type 1 type 2 F7H 160 161 Supplement: Parameter Change 5. 00H–35H of Program Change Transmit Table 32 TXPGM1 (MSB) 33 TXPGM1 (LSB) ↓ 102 TXPGM36 (MSB) 103 TXPGM36 (LSB) 104 105 DUMP REQUEST data check_sum F7H APPENDIX 80 check_sum F7H data 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 ↓ 29 30 F0H 43H 2NH 7AH S K 2 4 9 0 P R 00H F7H ■ INDEX A N APPENDIX ..........................................................................55 Auto Store............................................................................45 Name (Performance) ...........................................................50 B Organ Combination .............................................................50 O Backup Battery ......................................................................2 Balance (Dual) .....................................................................27 Balance (Split) .....................................................................30 Bank Select (PC Table) .......................................................47 Bass, Electric/Upright ..........................................................21 Blank Chart ..........................................................................64 Bulk Dump ...........................................................................55 P Panel Switch (PS)................................................................50 PERFORMANCE PLAY MODE...........................................38 Performance Enable ............................................................45 Performance Name .............................................................50 Performance Parameters ....................................................12 Pitch Bend Range................................................................51 Play Modes ..........................................................................10 Popup Time .........................................................................45 PRECAUTIONS.....................................................................2 Preset Performance List ......................................................64 Preset Voice List..................................................................63 Program Change (PC) Table ...............................................46 Program Change Receive ...................................................47 Program Change Transmit ..................................................46 C Channel ...............................................................................47 Continuous Slider (CS) ........................................................48 CS FC ..................................................................................48 D Demo Songs ........................................................................17 Detune .................................................................................27 Device Number ....................................................................44 Dual Mode ...........................................................................26 R REAR PANEL ........................................................................9 Receive Filter.......................................................................46 Reverb ...........................................................................22, 52 Reverb Bypass ....................................................................44 E EDIT MODE.........................................................................42 Edit Menu Tree ....................................................................42 Equalizer (Internal) ..............................................................52 Equalizer (Panel) .................................................................24 Error Messages ...................................................................60 S Single Mode.........................................................................20 Specifications ......................................................................63 Split Mode............................................................................28 Split point .......................................................................29, 31 Stereo/Mono Piano ..............................................................21 STORE ................................................................................53 Store Type ...........................................................................45 System.................................................................................44 System Settings...................................................................13 F Foot Controller (FC).............................................................48 G GETTING STARTED ...........................................................14 I Initialize................................................................................56 Internal Control Functions ...................................................49 Internal Equalizer.................................................................52 T APPENDIX K Transmit Filter......................................................................46 Transpose............................................................................33 Troubleshooting ...................................................................61 Keyboard Sensitivity ............................................................51 U L UPPER PANEL .....................................................................4 Local ....................................................................................48 V M Velocity Curves....................................................................52 VOICE PLAY MODE ...........................................................19 Voice Parameters ................................................................11 Voices and Polyphony .........................................................20 Main and Sub Voices.....................................................25, 32 Master Tune ........................................................................44 MIDI (Using MIDI) ................................................................57 MIDI Control Change Messages .........................................49 MIDI Data Format ................................................................72 MIDI Filter ............................................................................46 MIDI Implementation Chart..................................................81 MIDI Merge ..........................................................................44 MIDI Panic ...........................................................................37 MIDI System Connections ...................................................58 MIDI Transmit Enable ..........................................................36 Modulation .....................................................................23, 52 Modulation Wheel Assign ....................................................51 82